Tascam DVD Recorder BD R2000 User Manual
LST1148-001B  
BD-R2000  
TM  
HDD/BLU-RAY /DVD RECORDER  
OWNER'S MANUAL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Precaution  
CAUTION:  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
1) Read these instructions.  
Changes or modifications not approved by TASCAM could void  
user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
2) Keep these instructions.  
3) Heed all warnings.  
4) Follow all instructions.  
5) Do not use this apparatus near water.  
6) Clean only with dry cloth.  
7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with  
the manufacturer’s instructions.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the  
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC  
Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference in a residential  
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate  
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular  
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to  
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning  
the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct  
the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
8) Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat  
registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that  
produce heat.  
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or  
groundingtype plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one  
wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and  
a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are  
provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into  
your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete  
outlet.  
10)Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched  
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point  
where they exit from the apparatus.  
11)Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.  
12)Use only with the cart, stand, tripod,  
bracket, or table specified by the  
Increase the separation between the equipment and  
receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different  
from that to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician  
for help.  
manufacturer, or sold with the  
apparatus. When a cart is used, use  
caution when moving the  
cart/apparatus combination to avoid  
When the equipment is installed in a cabinet or a shelf, make sure  
that it has sufficient space on all sides to allow for ventilation  
(10 cm or more on both sides, on top and at the rear).  
When discarding batteries, environmental problems must be  
considered and the local rules or laws governing the disposal of  
these batteries must be followed strictly.  
injury from tip-over.  
13)Unplug this apparatus during lightning  
storms or when unused for long periods  
Use the supplied power cord.  
(If not, fire or electric shock may be caused.)  
of time.  
14)Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is  
required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way,  
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been  
spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus  
has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally,  
or has been dropped.  
DON'T continue to operate the equipment if you are in any doubt  
about it working normally, or if it is damaged in any way -- switch  
off, withdraw the mains plug and consult your dealer.  
DO be careful with glass panels or doors on equipment.  
DO consult you dealer if you are ever in doubt about the  
installation, operation or safety of your equipment.  
NEVER let anyone especially children push anything into holes,  
slots or any other opening in the case -- this could result in a fatal  
electrical shock.  
Failure to heed the following precautions may result in  
damage to the unit, remote control or disc/cassette.  
1. DO NOT place the unit -  
- in an environment prone to extreme temperatures or humidity.  
- in direct sunlight.  
MOISTURE CONDENSATION  
Moisture in the air will condense on the unit when you move it from  
a cold place to a warm place, or under extremely humid  
conditions^just as water droplets form on the surface of a glass  
filled with cold liquid. In conditions where condensation may occur,  
disconnect the unit’s power plug from the wall and keep it  
disconnected for a few hours to let the moisture dry, then turn on  
the unit.  
- in a dusty environment.  
- in an environment where strong magnetic fields are generated.  
- on a surface that is unstable or subject to vibration.  
2. DO NOT block the unit’s ventilation openings or holes.  
(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a newspaper  
or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.)  
3. DO NOT place heavy objects on the unit or remote control.  
4. DO NOT place anything which might spill on top of the unit  
or remote control.  
(If water or liquid is allowed to enter this equipment, fire or  
electric shock may be caused.)  
5. DO NOT expose the apparatus to dripping or splashing.  
6. DO NOT use this equipment in a bathroom or places with  
water. Also DO NOT place any containers filled with water or  
liquids (such as cosmetics or medicines, flower vases, potted  
plants, cups, etc.) on top of this unit.  
7. DO NOT place any naked flame sources, such as lighted  
candles, on the apparatus.  
8. AVOID violent shocks to the unit during transport.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Precaution  
DISCLAIMER OF LIABILITY  
TASCAM shall not be liable for any loss relating to the unit’s failure  
to properly record, store or playback any content (video, audio or  
otherwise) for any reason whatsoever. Any applicable warranties  
shall only cover replacement or repair of the effected unit, and shall  
not apply to recovery or replacement of lost content.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.Dolby and  
the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;  
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,392,195;  
7,272,567; 7,333,929; 7,212,872 & other U.S. and worldwide  
patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered  
trademarks, & DTS-HD, DTS-HD Master Audio | Essential and the  
DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software.  
© DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.  
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is  
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.  
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized  
by Rovi Corporation, and is intended for home and other  
limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Rovi  
Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
DVD logo is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.  
0 HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are  
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the  
United States and other countries.  
0 “Blu-ray Disc”, “Blu-ray” and “Blu-ray Disc” logo are trademarks of  
Blu-ray Disc Association.  
0 “x.v.Color” and the “x.v.Color” logo are trademarks of Sony Corporation.  
0 Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks  
or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United  
States and other countries.  
0
0
ATTENTION:  
Using a mobile phone in the vicinity of the unit may cause picture  
vibration on the TV screen or change the screen to a black back  
display.  
Some TVs or other appliances generate strong magnetic fields.  
Do not place such appliances on top of the unit as it may cause  
picture disturbance.  
0
0
When moving the product, press  
to turn off the power, and  
A
wait at least 30 seconds before unplugging the power cord.  
Then, wait at least 2 minutes before moving the product.  
If there is a power outage when using the unit, the recorded data  
may be erased.  
It is recommended to back up discs which contain important  
recordings periodically (every few years). As digital signals do  
not deteriorate, failure to play back or record might arise due to  
the effects of the disc aging through the years depending on the  
storage environment.  
Recorded programs and data cannot be restored once the disc  
or tape is damaged.  
This unit can play back and record only NTSC signals.  
The hard disk is a consumable item. Replacement is  
recommended after 10000 hours of use (if use in a 25°C  
environment). For information on maintenance planning and  
costs, consult your nearest TASCAM dealer.  
0
0 SDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.  
0 i.LINK and the "i.LINK" Logo are trademarks.  
0 “AVCHD” and the “AVCHD” logo are trademarks of Panasonic  
Corporation and Sony Corporation.  
0 Other product and company names included in this instruction  
manual are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of  
theirrespective holders.  
The fan motor is a consumable item. Replacement is  
recommended after 30000 hours of use (if use in a 25°C  
environment). For information on maintenance planning  
andcosts, consult your nearest TASCAM dealer.  
0 This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio  
license and VC-1 patent portfolio license for the personal  
and noncommercial use of a consumer to (i) encode video  
in compliance with the AVC Standard and VC-1 Standard  
(“AVC/VC-1 Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC/VC-1 Video that  
was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non-  
commercial activity and/or was obtained from a video provider  
licensed to provide AVC/VC-1 Video. No license is granted or  
shall be implied for any other use. Additional information may  
be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegla.com.  
If this symbol is shown, it is only valid in the European  
Union.  
HOW TO USE THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL  
0 All major sections and subsections are listed in the Table Of  
Contents on page 5. Use this when searching for information on a  
specific procedure or feature.  
Batteries -- Incorrect use of batteries may cause the batteries  
to burst or ignite. A leaky battery may corrode the equipment,  
dirty your hands or spoil your clothing. In order to avoid these  
problems, make sure to observe the precautions below:  
0 The A mark signals a reference to another page for instructions or  
related information.  
0 Operation buttons necessary for the various procedures are clearly  
indicated through the use of illustrations at the beginning of each  
major section.  
0 Use the specified batteries only.  
0 Install the batteries with due attention to the plus (+) and minus  
(-) sides of the batteries according to the instructions in the  
compartment.  
0 Do not mix old and new batteries.  
0 Do not mix batteries of different types. Voltage specifications of  
batteries of the same shape may vary.  
0 Replace an exhausted battery with a new one promptly.  
0 If you will not use the remote control for a long time, remove the  
batteries.  
IMPORTANT:  
0 Please read the various precautions on page 2 to 4 before installing  
or operating the unit.  
0 It should be noted that it may be unlawful to re-record prerecorded  
tapes or discs without the consent of the owner of copyright in the  
sound or video recording, broadcast or cable programme and in  
any literary, dramatic, musical, or artistic work embodied therein.  
0 If leaked battery fluid gets on your skin or clothing,  
rinseimmediately and thoroughly. If it gets into you eye, bathe  
your eye well rather than rubbing and seek medical treatment  
immediately. Leaked battery fluid that gets into your eye or your  
clothing may cause a skin irritation or damage your eye.  
0 Do not put the batteries in a place where young children can  
reach.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Playing Videos on the HDD.............................................. 54  
Playing Videos on a SD Card............................................ 54  
Playing Still Images (JPEG).............................................. 55  
Changing Playback Settings............................................. 56  
Playback Settings Menu.................................................... 56  
Audio/subtitle settings.................................................... 56  
Playback settings........................................................... 56  
Video settings ................................................................ 57  
Contents  
Safety Precaution  
Contents  
Getting Started  
Key Features....................................................................... 6  
How to Read this Manual.................................................... 6  
Other Precautionary Notes.................................................. 7  
Hard Disk Drive (HDD)........................................................ 8  
SD Cards............................................................................. 8  
On-screen Displays............................................................. 9  
Discs .................................................................................. 9  
Precautions on the Use of Discs....................................... 11  
Precautions for placement and use................................... 12  
Name and Function of Parts ............................................. 13  
Front panel..................................................................... 13  
Display window.............................................................. 14  
Rear panel..................................................................... 14  
Remote control .............................................................. 15  
Editing  
Editing............................................................................... 58  
Entering Characters.......................................................... 59  
Character List ................................................................ 59  
Grouping ........................................................................... 60  
Changing the Title/Group Name........................................ 62  
Deleting a Title/Group ....................................................... 62  
Turning On Title/Group Protection .................................... 63  
Turning Off Title/Group Protection..................................... 64  
Creating a Playlist............................................................. 65  
Editing a Thumbnail .......................................................... 66  
Editing a Chapter .............................................................. 67  
Dividing ............................................................................. 69  
Delete Scenes................................................................... 70  
Changing the Disc Name.................................................. 72  
Changing the Shooting Date/Time.................................... 72  
Mode conversion............................................................... 73  
Preparation  
Connecting a Monitor........................................................ 17  
Connecting a Video Deck or Other Equipment ................. 18  
Connecting an Amplifier.................................................... 18  
Connecting External Devices............................................ 19  
Connecting the Power Supply........................................... 19  
Setting and Displaying Date/Time..................................... 20  
Settings Menu  
Changing Settings of this Unit........................................... 74  
Setting Menu List .............................................................. 74  
Setup ............................................................................. 75  
Playback Setting............................................................ 76  
Record........................................................................... 77  
Audio.............................................................................. 78  
Display........................................................................... 79  
Connection..................................................................... 80  
Dubbing/Importing  
Dubbing/Importing............................................................. 23  
Dubbing chart ................................................................ 24  
Formatting......................................................................... 25  
Recording Modes.............................................................. 28  
Importing Data to the HDD Using the ONE TOUCH  
DUBBING Button........................................................... 29  
Others  
Locking the Disc Tray........................................................ 82  
Turning on the Mode Lock ................................................ 82  
Last Function Memory....................................................... 82  
RS-232C Interface ........................................................... 83  
Command Table............................................................. 83  
Specifications................................................................. 83  
Command...................................................................... 84  
Language Code List.......................................................... 94  
Country Code List ............................................................. 96  
Importing Data from a BD/DVD to the HDD...................... 30  
Importing Data from a USB-compatible Device to the HDD  
....................................................................................... 33  
Importing Data from an SD Card to the HDD.................... 35  
Importing Data from an i.LINK-compatible Device to the  
HDD............................................................................... 37  
Dubbing a Title from the HDD to a BD/DVD...................... 39  
Dubbing Still Images from the HDD.................................. 42  
Enabling Playback on Other Devices (Finalizing)............. 44  
Copying the Entire Disc..................................................... 46  
Recording Using External Inputs....................................... 47  
Using the HDMI Consumer Electronics Control (HDMI  
CEC).............................................................................. 98  
Creating a Seamless BD................................................... 98  
Troubleshooting ................................................................ 99  
Specifications.................................................................. 101  
Index ............................................................................... 102  
Important Notice Concerning the Software..................... 103  
Playing Back  
About Playing Back........................................................... 48  
Using Playback Navigation ............................................... 48  
Option menu list............................................................. 50  
Video Playback Operation................................................. 51  
Playing Videos on a BD/DVD............................................ 53  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Key Features  
How to Read this Manual  
Professional Blu-ray Disc recorder of the  
About this manual  
This manual mainly describes operation procedures using the  
remote control unit buttons.  
• The buttons on the remote control unit are indicated as  
[Button Name].  
high-definition era  
Copy videos to a Blu-ray Disc in high-definition from a high-  
definition camcorder, or down convert the videos and record  
them onto DVDs, all without the need for a PC.  
The internal hard disk drive enables for easy editing and  
dubbing multiple discs.  
• The menu items are indicated as "Menu Item".  
o
Supplementary remarks in the main text  
Memo : States restrictions on the functions or use of this unit.  
Note : States precautions to be taken during operation.  
Compatibility with other consumer  
camcorders  
In addition to AVCHD, HDV and DV formats are also  
compatible, and digital dubbing can be done.  
A
: Indicates the page numbers or items to refer to.  
Memo:  
The displays of operable media are highlighted.  
HDD : Hard disk  
DVD : DVD  
Digital interface that allows for camcorder  
compatibility  
This unit is equipped with USB, SD slots and i.Link input  
terminals for connecting the camcorder.  
BD  
SD  
: Blu-ray disc  
: SD card  
SDHC : SDHC Card  
CD  
: Music compact disc  
Create menu-supported Blu-ray discs  
Blu-ray discs can be created using the BDMV (with menu)  
format. BDAV discs can also be created and dubbed  
according to the intended use.  
JPEG : JPEG (still picture) file disc  
Menu operation  
Pressing the remote control buttons below calls up the  
respective menu screens.  
• [SET UP], [NAVIGATION], [EDIT], [INFORMATION  
Compatible with dual layer 50 GB Blu-ray  
discs, and records up to 24 hours of full  
high-definition images in a single disc  
This unit is also compatible with high capacity dual layer 50  
GB Blu-ray discs, and up to 24 hours (AE mode) of full high-  
definition images can be recorded in a single disc.  
CORRECT], [DUBBING], [MEDIA MANAGE]  
• Press any of the [  
/
/
/
] buttons to move to a  
J
K
H
I
specific menu item (yellow item indicated by a small arrow).  
• Press the [OK] button to confirm the selection.  
• Press the [RETURN] button to return to the previous  
screen.  
Writing to inexpensive LTH discs is also supported.  
• Simple instructions on the operation procedure may be  
displayed at the bottom of the screen.  
Authoring menu enables discs to be  
created and used industrially such as for  
demonstrations  
Disc authoring can be used to create discs for industrial use,  
such as discs that repeat playback automatically.  
Equipped with external control RS-232C  
terminal  
This unit is equipped with a RS-232C terminal that allows for  
external control using a PC.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Disclaimer of compensation for loss or  
Other Precautionary Notes  
damage of stored video content  
Please note that our company will not be liable for  
compensation of the content or any incidental damages in the  
event that dubbing or playback cannot be performed properly  
for some reasons. The same applies during repair of this unit.  
Copyright protection  
This unit supports copyright protection technologies.  
Copyrights  
• According to the copyright law, video or music data that you  
store must not be used for purposes other than personal  
enjoyment without the authorization of the copyright holder.  
• This product employs the CPRM technology, and is rotected  
by the proprietary technologies as well as intellectual  
roperty rights of the United States and Japan.  
Handling precautions  
o
Do not use the plug or power point with dust  
or metallic objects attached to it  
• Failure to do so may cause short circuit or heating, and  
result in fire or electric shock.  
• Remove the plug once every half a year, and clean it with a  
dry cloth.  
Use of the CPRM technology is subject to the approval  
of Macrovision Solutions Corporation. Unless special  
authorization is obtained from Macrovision Solutions  
Corporation, the CPRM is restricted to household and  
some pay-per-view uses. Do not dismantle or remodel  
this product. The copyright protection function prevents  
copyrighted video images from being saved to equipment  
such as a video recorder. This function may also cause  
deterioration in the playback picture quality when the data  
is output to a monitor through a video recorder. This is not  
a hardware malfunction. To play back copyrighted videos,  
connect this product directly to the monitor.  
• Read and understand fully the terms and conditions of  
all copyright works before using this unit in the correct  
manner. Under no circumstances shall TASCAM take any  
responsibility for any infringements of copyright caused by  
the customer when using this unit. The customer shall be  
responsible for resolving all legal issues regarding to any  
copyright infringements.  
o
Make use of a power point that allows the  
power plug to be inserted or removed easily  
• Make sure that the plug can be removed immediately in  
case an abnormality is found in the unit.  
o
Insert the plug firmly into the power point  
• Failure to do so may cause short circuit or heating, and  
result in fire or electric shock.  
o
Do not make use of a power voltage other  
than that specified  
• Doing so may result in fire or electric shock.  
o
Do not insert or remove the plug with wet  
hands  
• Doing so may result in electric shock.  
o
Do not touch the plug when there is thunder  
or lightning  
Stored video content and compensation  
• For discs containing important video content, backup on  
a periodic basis (once every few years) is recommended.  
Although digital signals do not deteriorate, playback or  
dubbing may fail due to aging of the disc resulting from the  
storage conditions.  
• Recorded data may be lost if power outage occurs while  
this unit is being used. It is therefore recommended that  
videos stored on the HDD be dubbed to a BD or DVD as  
soon as possible in case the HDD breaks down.  
• Doing so may cause electric shock.  
o
Do not insert any foreign object into this unit  
• Doing so may result in fire or electric shock.  
o
Do not dismantle or remodel this unit  
• This unit consists of high-voltage components. Dismantling  
or remodeling the unit may cause fire or electric shock.  
• Videos or data stored on a BD/DVD, HDD, or SD card  
cannot be recovered if the media is damaged.  
o
Request the authorized dealer to inspect the  
interior part of the unit once a year  
• Using this unit with dust accumulated inside may result in  
fire.  
• It is particularly effective to perform servicing before the  
humid rainy season.  
• Doing so may result in malfunction.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Hard Disk Drive (HDD)  
Hard disk drive (HDD)  
The HDD rotates at a high speed whenever the power is  
turned "On".  
SD Cards  
Precautions for handling SD and SDHC  
cards  
Note:  
• The disc operation display icon appears blinking and  
“READING” is displayed on the display window when  
the SD card is being accessed (such as during dubbing,  
playback, or formatting). When access to the SD card is in  
progress, do not remove the card or the power plug. Doing  
so may cause the SD card to become unusable.  
If the SD card is not usable, reformat the card. If the problem  
persists even after reformatting, use a new SD card.  
Pay particular attention to the following precautions when  
using this unit.  
Warning  
• Do not subject it to vibration or strong impact  
Subjecting this unit to excessive impact may result in loss  
of recorded data and even damage of the HDD.  
• Do not remove the power plug when this unit is running  
Shutting down the power when the HDD is running may  
result in data loss and even damage of the HDD. Make sure  
that the power plug is removed only after turning off the  
power.  
• Do not use or store the card at a place that is subject to  
static or electrical noise.  
• Inserting the SD card incorrectly may cause this unit or the  
card to malfunction.  
(Wait for the "GOODBYE" message on the display window  
to disappear first)  
• Our company will not be liable for any damage or loss of the  
stored data due to accidents. (Be sure to back up the data.)  
• Use the card according to the prescribed conditions. Do not  
use it at the following locations.  
• Places that are exposed to direct sunlight  
• Places near heat-generating equipment  
• Inside a car that is under the sun with the windows tightly  
shut  
• Places that are subject to high humidity and corrosion  
• Do not bend or drop the card, or subject it to strong impact  
or vibration.  
• Do not expose the card to water.  
• Do not place near devices that emit strong magnetic or  
radio waves.  
• Do not touch the metal part of the card.  
Memo:  
To dispose a card after erasing all data inside, it is  
recommended that this be done using a commercially  
available data deletion software, or by destroying the card  
physically, such as with a hammer. Formatting or deletion  
of data using this unit only changes the file administration  
information, and does not erase the data completely.  
BD video data  
You can erase BD Video data from the SD card as follows.  
1 Insert the SD card which has BD video data  
stored on it, into the [SD SLOT]  
Memo:  
• The BD video data cannot be erased if the SD card is write-  
protected. In this case, turn off the write-protect lock before  
inserting the SD card.  
2 Press the [MEDIA MANAGE] button on the remote  
control unit  
3 Select “BD-VIDEO DATA ERASE” from “SD  
CARD”  
• The confirmation screen for erasing the BD video data is  
displayed.  
4 Select “ERASE”, and press the [OK] button  
• The BD video data will be erased.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
On-screen Displays  
Discs  
Status display  
BD recording formats  
Displays the current settings and operating status (such as  
playback, pause) of this unit.  
Pressing the [ON SCREEN] button on the remote control  
displays the status. To cancel the display, press the [ON  
SCREEN] button again.  
o
BDAV mode  
• Videos can be edited (chapter edit etc) and new videos can  
be added to the disk. This format is suitable for recording  
videos.  
You can select whether to display the statuses by changing  
the settings in the settings menu.  
For more details, refer to "Display" (A page 79) .  
• MPEG2 with HD quality will be recorded as it is onto  
the disc. This format has low playback compatibility, but  
performs well when used for backups.  
Memo:  
o
BDMV mode  
• To display the statuses, set the ON SCREEN GUIDE item  
on the DISPLAY menu screen to “AUTO”.  
• Compatible and playable on other BD players. Menu  
functions similar to those of DVD video mode are also  
included.  
• Setting the DISPLAY item to “OFF” hides display of all  
status information.  
This format performs well for distribution purposes.  
Event display  
An on-screen event display appears on the display window as  
well as the monitor when there is a misoperation.  
DVD recording formats  
o
VR MODE  
• Format the disc using “VR MODE” if you want to add new  
videos to the disc.  
• The event display appears for an interval of about three  
seconds.  
• Deleting currently saved videos increases the remaining  
space on the disc. (except for the case of DVD-R discs.)  
Memo:  
• The same event display may appear several times.  
o
VIDEO MODE  
• Format the disc in this mode if you want to play the disc on  
a different DVD player.  
Alarm display  
When an operation is not accepted by this unit, an on-screen  
alarm display appears on the display of the main unit as well  
as the monitor.  
Formatting of discs  
Formatting is required for some disc types. Perform formatting  
if this is necessary.  
o
When using BD-RE or BD-R discs  
Formatting is required. Format the disc using this unit.  
o
When using DVD-R discs  
Formatting is required depending on the disc mode to be  
used.  
• Formatting is required when the disc is used in “VR MODE”.  
Format the disc using this unit.  
• Formatting is not required when using the disc in “VIDEO  
MODE”.  
Note:  
• BD-R and DVD-R discs cannot be reformatted. Check the  
disc mode before formatting the disc.  
o
When using DVD-RW discs  
Formatting is required. Format the disc using this unit.  
• Format using “VR MODE” or “VIDEO MODE”.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Discs (Continued)  
Discs that enable both dubbing and  
playback  
Disc Type  
Recording Format  
Format  
Finalize  
Repeated Use  
(Reformat)  
BD-RE  
BD-R  
BDAV mode  
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
BDMV mode  
BDAV mode  
BDMV mode  
Video mode  
VR mode  
-
X
-
-
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
Video mode  
VR mode  
-
X
Discs that enable playback only  
Disc Type  
Description  
DVD-RAM (4.7 GB)  
BD-ROM  
Supports specific forms of playback, but no recording can be done.  
Commercially available Blu-ray discs (movies, music, etc.)  
The region code that can be played back on this unit is “A”.  
DVD video  
Music CD  
Commercially available DVD-Video discs (movies, music, etc.)  
The region code that can be played back on this unit is “1”. The video format used is NTSC.  
CD-DA  
DTS music CDs are also playable.  
Memo:  
• If 8 cm discs are used, only playback can be performed. The disc cannot be used for recording or editing.  
• 8 cm discs can be used without adapters.  
• DVD-RAM cartridges and BD-RE are not supported. Take the DVD-RAM out of the cartridge before using it.  
Discs that are not supported  
• DVD-RAM (2.6 GB/5.2 GB)  
• DVD-R (for authoring)  
• CD-ROM/R/RW (PhotoCD, CD-G, VCD etc.)  
• DDCD (1.3 GB, Double Density CD)  
• HDCD (High Density CD)  
Memo:  
• To playback a BD or DVD that was created using this unit on another player, finalize the disc.  
• There is no need for finalizing if the BD-RE disc is recorded using BDAV mode.  
• If a DVD that was recorded using VR mode has been finalized, the disc can only be played back on VR mode compatible  
devices.  
• To perform high-speed dubbing, make use of a disc that supports high-speed recording.  
• This unit can play back and record only NTSC signals.  
Note:  
• Do not use disc if the sticker or label is peeled off from the disc surface, if the disc is not round in shape, or if it is significantly  
warped or cracked.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Disc storage  
Precautions on the Use of  
Discs  
• Avoid storing the disc at the following locations.  
• Places that are subject to high humidity, dust, or mold  
growth  
• Places that are exposed to direct sunlight or near a  
heater  
• Inside a car during summer  
• Do not drop the disc or subject it to strong impact.  
• Place the disc in a case and store it vertically.  
• Stacking the discs without using a case, placing the  
discs against one another or dropping them may result in  
deformation or cracking.  
Maintenance of discs  
• Dirt attached to the disc, such as fingerprints and dust, may  
cause distortion in the video image or sound.  
Keep the disc clean at all times such as by using a soft  
cloth.  
• Wipe the disc lightly from the center outward using the  
cloth.  
• If dirt is stubborn, wipe it off using a slightly wet cloth,  
followed by a dry cloth.  
When the recording/playback lens is dirty  
• Do not use thinner, benzine, alcohol, conventional record  
cleaners, or antistatic sprays.  
Doing so may damage the disc surface.  
Dust or dirt may be attached to the recording/playback  
lens after using this unit for a prolonged period of time, and  
recording or playback may not be properly performed as a  
result.  
Although the performance of this unit varies according  
to the frequency of use and installation environment, it is  
recommended that cleaning of the lens be performed once  
every half a year using commercially available DVD lens  
cleaners.  
Handling discs  
o
Removing a disc  
For cleaning procedures, refer to the instruction manual of the  
lens cleaner.  
Precautions when playing a dual disc  
The side of the dual disc that is not used for DVD recording  
does not comply with the standard specifications of music  
CDs.  
o
Keeping a disc  
It is recommended that playback on this unit be limited to the  
DVD recording side of the dual disc.  
Recommended discs  
The best performance may not be obtained for some discs.  
It is recommended that JVC discs be used to ensure the best  
results.  
o
Correct way to hold a disc  
Power Cable  
Do not unplug the cable during recording or playback.  
Doing so may cause the disc to become unusable.  
If the disc becomes unusable, refer to the following.  
BD-R or : Use a new disc.  
DVD-R  
• Make sure that your hands do not touch the recording/  
BD-RE or : Reformat the disc after erasing the data. If the  
DVD-RW disc is still not usable, use a new disc.  
playback side of the disc.  
Do not turn off the [  
] button or unplug the power cable  
A
immediately after closing the disc tray.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Rack Mounting Notes  
If this product is to be used without being rack-mounted,  
please affix the enclosed FOOT parts to the bottom face of  
the unit.  
Precautions for placement  
and use  
Precautions When Mounting Rack  
Attaching the FOOT parts.  
• The guaranteed operating temperature range of this prod-  
• Carefully turn the unit upside down.  
uct is 5º - 35º C (41º- 95º F).  
• Do not install in the following types of places. Doing so  
could degrade the image quality and/or cause malfunctions.  
• Places with significant vibrations or that are otherwise  
• Removing the seal from each FOOT part exposes a self-  
adhesive surface.  
• Attach one FOOT part to each of the 4 places noted in the  
diagram.  
unstable  
• Turn the unit back to its normal orientation.  
• Near windows or other places exposed to direct sunlight  
• Near heaters or other extremely hot places  
• Extremely cold places  
FOOT  
• Places with bad ventilation or high humidity  
• Make sure that the unit is mounted in a level position for  
correct operation.  
• In order to promote the emission of heat, do not place  
anything on top of this product.  
• Do not place this product on top of a powered amplifier or  
other equipment that emits heat.  
• When using rack mount, keep the clearance between the  
rack and the rear of unit 150mm or more.  
• When installing this unit or the like to the rack, refer to the  
consumption current value of the nameplate of each device  
so that the current capacity (including rated capacity of  
power supply wire) of the rack is not exceeded.  
• Use the rack that meets the following requirements:  
• must be equipped with overcurrent protection  
• must be equipped with protective earthing conductor  
power plug and socket  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Name and Function of  
Parts  
Front panel  
A
B
C
D
E FG H I J K L M  
N
O
P
Q
R
[
] button  
A
A
Playback control buttons  
N
Switches operation between on and standby.  
• [ ] button  
I
Disc tray  
B
Plays back the data.  
• [ ] button  
o
[
] button  
C
M
Stops playback/recording.  
Opens/closes the disc tray.  
• [  
] button  
O
Display window  
D
E
F
Fast reverses playback.  
• [ ] button  
Remote control sensor  
[RESET] switch  
N
Fast forwards playback.  
• [ ] button  
Reset the unit.  
[REC MODE] button  
W
G
Pauses playback.  
] button  
Switches the recording mode.  
[HDD] lamp  
[
O
R
H
Starts recording of a title.  
[SD SLOT]  
Lights up when in HDD mode.  
The [REC] lamp lights up while recording/importing.  
P
Used for inserting SD cards.  
[i.LINK(HDV/DV IN)] terminal  
[INPUT SELECT] button  
I
Q
Switches the external input signals (HDV/DV, L1).  
[BD] lamp  
Connect a video camera using i.LINK (HDV/DV. IN).  
[USB] terminal  
J
R
Lights up when in BD/DVD mode.  
The [REC] lamp lights up while recording/dubbing.  
Connect a video camera using USB.  
[MEDIA SELECT] button  
K
Switches between HDD and BD/SD.  
[SD] lamp  
L
Lights up when in SD mode.  
[ONE TOUCH DUBBING] button  
M
Starts dubbing at a single touch.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Name and Function of  
Parts (Continued)  
Display window  
A
B
C
D
HDD/DISC remaining level display  
Dubbing display  
A
B
C
D
English messages appear for a number of operations.  
(Examples)  
HELLO  
: When the power plug is inserted  
Disc status display  
READING : When reading the disc  
ONSCREEN : Upon moving to the playback navigation  
screen  
HDMI output display  
Memo:  
• The brightness of the display window can be adjusted.  
For more details, refer to “PANEL DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS”  
(A page 75).  
Rear panel  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
AC inlet  
A
[SERIAL COM.(RS-232C)] terminal  
F
For connecting the power supply.  
For connecting to a computer using a serial cable.  
[HDMI] terminal  
Cooling fan  
B
G
[DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)] terminal  
C
For connecting using an HDMI cable.  
[S-VIDEO OUT/IN] terminals  
For connecting to the amplifier using an optical audio cable.  
[AUDIO OUT/IN] terminals  
H
D
For connecting using an S-video cable.  
[COMPONENT VIDEO OUT] terminals  
For connecting using an audio cable.  
[VIDEO OUT/IN] terminals  
I
E
For connecting using a component video cable.  
[REMOTE IN] terminal  
For connecting using a video cable.  
J
For connecting a wired remote control.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
[
/
/
/
]
I
J
K
H
I
Remote control  
The cursor can be moved to select an item.  
[OPTION]  
J
Displays the option screen.  
A
[
]
K
S
T
V
Move to the chapter just before the current chapter.  
B
C
U
W
[
]
L
O
Fast reverses the video and starts slow playback.  
[
]
M
R
Press the [ ] and [ ] buttons together to start recording.  
R
I
D
[REC MODE]  
N
X
For checking the recording mode settings and amount of time  
remaining.  
Y
E
[ON SCREEN]  
O
Z
b
Displays information on the screen.  
[PROGRESSIVE SCAN]  
F
G
a
c
P
Switches the resolution of the image output.  
[AUDIO]  
H
I
Q
Switches the playback audio.  
[EDIT]  
d
f
R
J
e
g
Displays the editing menu screen.  
[MEDIA MANAGE]  
K
L
M
S
Displays the media management menu screen.  
h
j
[
]
T
A
i
k
Switches operation between on and standby.  
[INPUT SELECT]  
N
O
P
Q
R
U
Switches the external input signals (HDV/DV, L1).  
[BD/SD]  
l
n
p
V
m
o
For operating BD/DVD or SD.  
[PAGE PRV][PAGE NEXT]  
W
S
Returns to the previous page. Or advances to the next page.  
[
]
X
w
Move the playback position slightly backwards.  
[
]
Y
v
Advance the playback position slightly.  
[#]  
Z
[DELETE]  
A
For entering characters.  
[YELLOW]  
Deletes a title or characters.  
a
[
]
B
M
Enabled when the color button (yellow) is displayed.  
[BLUE]  
Opens/closes the disc tray.  
[HDD]  
b
C
Enabled when the color button (blue) is displayed.  
[NAVIGATION]  
For operating the HDD.  
[1]-[9]  
c
D
Displays the playback navigation screen.  
[OK]  
For entering characters.  
[Z]  
d
E
Confirms a selection or entry.  
[RETURN]  
For entering characters.  
[RED]  
e
F
Returns to the previous screen without applying the selection  
or entry.  
Enabled when the color button (red) is displayed.  
[GREEN]  
[
]
G
f
T
Enabled when the color button (green) is displayed.  
[DUBBING]  
Move to the next chapter.  
H
Displays the dubbing menu screen.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Remote control codes  
Name and Function of  
Parts (Continued)  
By setting a remote control code for the unit and remote  
control, you can prevent two recorders from operating  
simultaneously using the remote control for this unit.  
(the setting for the unit and remote control at time of purchase  
is “REMOTE CONTROL 3”.)  
[
]
g
N
Fast forwards the video and starts slow playback.  
[
]
h
I
Memo:  
Plays the video.  
• Changing the remote control code for the remote control  
before the unit’s remote control code is changed will cause  
the unit to be inoperable. Change the unit’s remote control  
code first when changing remote control codes.  
[
]
i
W
Pauses the video that is currently playing.  
[
]
j
o
Stops playback/recording.  
[MARK]  
o
Changing the remote control code for the  
unit  
k
Adds a chapter mark during playback or recording. Select  
multiple titles from the playback navigation screen or other  
screens.  
1 Press the [SET UP] button on the remote control  
to display the “SETUP” menu  
[PB MODE]  
l
2 Change the “REMOTE CONTROL CODE” option  
Display the playback settings screen.  
[ANGLE]  
in the “SETUP” menu  
m
Memo:  
Switches the camera angle for playback.  
[SET UP]  
• For more details, refer to “REMOTE CONTROL CODE” (A  
n
page 75).  
Displays the settings menu screen.  
o
[SUB TITLE]  
Changing the remote control code for the  
o
Switches the playback subtitle.  
remote control  
[INFORMATION CORRECT]  
p
1 Press and hold the [OPTIONS] button on the  
Displays the information editing screen.  
remote control  
2 Press either of the [1], [2], [3] or [4] buttons  
• Press the number button that is equivalent to the remote  
Change batteries for the remote control  
• If the operable distance of the remote control unit becomes  
shorter, this means that the batteries are running out.  
When this occurs, replace the batteries with new ones.  
control code you desire.  
3 Press the [OK] button  
• Press the [OK] button to change the remote control code.  
4 Release the [OPTIONS] button on the remote  
control  
Memo:  
• If the remote control code is different from the unit, the  
remote control code for the unit will be displayed on the  
display window.  
Examples: REMOTE CONTROL 3  
Batteries  
• Insert the batteries correctly according to the + and - signs.  
Insert the - side of the battery first.  
• If an error occurs while using the remote control unit,  
remove the batteries, wait for about five minutes, and  
operate the remote control unit again after re-inserting the  
batteries.  
Battery life : Approximately 6 months  
(depending on the frequency of use)  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation  
Memo:  
Connecting a Monitor  
• After connecting a component video cable, change the unit  
setting to “COMPONENT OUTPUT”.  
For more details, refer to “COMPONENT OUTPUT” (A page  
81) .  
To display video images from this unit, connect it to a monitor.  
• This unit supports connections using "HDMI cable",  
"component video cable", "S-video cable", or "video cable".  
Memo:  
Connecting using an S-video cable  
Connecting using an S-video cable (sold separately) delivers  
video images that are clearer than those by a video cable.  
• Switch to the appropriate monitor input according to the  
type of connection cable used.  
For details, refer to the instruction manual of the monitor.  
Connecting using a HDMI cable  
Connecting using a HDMI cable (sold separately) enables  
signals to be maintained in the digital format, and thus  
playback of clear video images.  
Connecting using a video cable  
Connect the output terminal of this unit to the input terminal of  
a TV using a BNC-BNC cable and an audio cable.  
Memo:  
• Videos cannot be displayed on a monitor that does not  
support the copyright protection system (HDCP).  
• Use a High Speed HDMI Cable.  
• After connecting using a HDMI cable, change the unit  
setting to “HDMI CONNECTION”.  
For more details, refer to " VIDEO PRIORITY MODE " (A  
page 80) .  
Note:  
• Connect the S-video/video output of this unit directly to the  
TV (or monitor). Connecting this unit to the TV or monitor  
via a video deck triggers the copy protection function, and  
may cause distortion in the video images during playback.  
Connecting using a component video cable  
Connecting using a component video cable (sold separately)  
delivers playback images that are clearer than those by an  
S-video cable.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation  
Connecting a Video Deck  
or Other Equipment  
Connecting an Amplifier  
Connecting an audio amplifier  
Connecting a video camera  
o
Connecting using an optical digital cable  
o
Connecting via the i.LINK terminal  
HDD  
REC  
BV  
REC  
SD  
REC  
INPUT  
MIDIA SELECT  
BD/SD  
ONE TOUCH  
DUBBING  
MODE  
SELECT  
HDD  
HDV/DV IN  
Memo:  
• Remove the protection cap of the cable before connecting.  
Store the protection cap properly to prevent it from being  
misplaced.  
o
Connecting via the USB terminal  
o
Connecting using an audio cable  
HDD  
REC  
BV  
REC  
SD  
REC  
MODE  
INPUT  
SELECT  
MIDIA SELECT  
BD/SD  
ONE TOUCH  
DUBBING  
HDD  
HDV/DV IN  
Memo:  
• Some video camera models may require an AC adapter  
instead of batteries to run. For details, refer to the video  
camera’s instruction manual.  
Connecting a video deck or other  
equipment (recording using this unit)  
Memo:  
• When connecting using an S-video cable, change the  
setting of “VIDEO INPUT SETTING” to “S-VIDEO”.  
For more details, refer to “VIDEO INPUT SETTING” (A page  
81) .  
• To record video images played back on this unit to an  
external device (video deck, etc.), connect the output  
terminal of this unit to the input terminal of the external  
device.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation  
Connecting External  
Devices  
Connecting the Power  
Supply  
Connect the supplied power cable to this unit as follows.  
Connecting a wired remote control  
1 Connect the supplied power cable to the AC IN  
Using a wired connection enables stable control of this unit  
from an external device.  
terminal of this unit  
Operation is possible using any code (1 to 4) regardless of  
the remote control code settings of this unit.  
2 Connect the other end of the power cable to a  
power point  
Memo:  
3 Press the [ ] button on the remote control or  
this unit to switch on the unit.  
• The power of this unit turns on, and a "HELLO" message  
A
• There is currently no compatible remote control unit  
available.  
• To create a wired remote controller, refer to “RS-232C  
Interface” (A page 83).  
appears on the display window.  
Note:  
• Do not use power cables other than that supplied with this  
unit. Doing so may cause this unit to malfunction.  
Connecting using a RS-232C cable  
External operation is enabled by connecting a RS-232C cable  
to a PC or similar device.  
For details on external operation, refer to “RS-232C Interface”  
(A page 83) .  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation  
4 Select “CLOCK SET”, and press the [OK] button  
• The Clock Set menu screen appears.  
Setting and Displaying  
Date/Time  
Set the date/time of the built-in clock as follows. The recording  
date/time is stored on the disc.  
5'672  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢁ&+52.#;  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6  
&#6'ꢀ&+52.#;  
/106*ꢄ&#;ꢄ;'#4  
ꢂꢃ*  
6+/'ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ%*1+%'  
Setting the date/time  
Set the date/time of the built-in clock as follows.  
1 Press the [SET UP] button on the remote control  
unit  
• The Settings menu screen appears.  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
4'6740  
5'672  
5'672  
5 Set the time and date  
• Repeat the steps below to specify the time and date.  
#761ꢀ219'4ꢀꢁ1((ꢂ  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀ%1&'  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢄ&+52.#;  
2#0'.ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ$4+)*60'55  
37+%-ꢀ56#4672  
1((  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀꢃ  
A
Press the [ ] or [ ] button, select the Clock Set  
J
K
item, and press the [OK] button.  
1((  
$7<<'4ꢀ176276  
&'(#7.6ꢀ5'66+0)  
5QHVYCTGꢀ8GTUKQPꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀZZZZZꢅZZZZZꢅZZZZZ  
5'672  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢁ&+52.#;  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
5'672  
4'6740  
;'#4  
/106*ꢁ&#;  
6+/'  
ꢂꢃꢃꢄ  
,#0ꢁꢃꢅ  
#/ꢅꢂꢆꢃꢃ  
2 Select “SETUP”, and press the [OK] button  
'06'4  
3 Select “CLOCK SET/DISPLAY”, and press the  
[OK] button  
• “CLOCK SET/DISPLAY” menu screen appears.  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
5'672  
4'6740  
B Press the [ ] or [ ] button, change the setting  
J
K
5'672  
value, and press the [OK] button.  
#761ꢀ219'4ꢀꢁ1((ꢂ  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀ%1&'  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢄ&+52.#;  
2#0'.ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ$4+)*60'55  
37+%-ꢀ56#4672  
1((  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀꢃ  
1((  
5'672  
$7<<'4ꢀ176276  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢁ&+52.#;  
&'(#7.6ꢀ5'66+0)  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6  
;'#4  
/106*ꢁ&#;  
6+/'  
ꢃꢅꢅꢆ  
ꢃꢅꢅꢆ  
,#0ꢁꢅꢂ  
#/ꢂꢃꢄꢅꢅ  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
5'672  
4'6740  
'06'4  
5'.'%6  
1-  
':+6  
5'672  
4'6740  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation  
6 After setting is complete, select “ENTER”, and  
3 Select “CLOCK SET/DISPLAY”, and press the  
press the [OK] button  
[OK] button  
• Doing so exits date/time setting, and returns to the initial  
• The Clock Set/Display menu screen appears.  
screen.  
5'672  
5'672  
#761ꢀ219'4ꢀꢁ1((ꢂ  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀ%1&'  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢄ&+52.#;  
2#0'.ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ$4+)*60'55  
37+%-ꢀ56#4672  
1((  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀꢃ  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢁ&+52.#;  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6  
1((  
;'#4  
/106*ꢁ&#;  
6+/'  
ꢂꢃꢃꢄ  
$7<<'4ꢀ176276  
,#0ꢁꢃꢅ  
#/ꢅꢂꢆꢃꢃ  
&'(#7.6ꢀ5'66+0)  
'06'4  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
5'672  
4'6740  
5'.'%6  
1-  
':+6  
5'672  
4'6740  
4 Select “DATE DISPLAY”, and press the [OK]  
button  
• The Date Display menu screen appears.  
Memo:  
• The value for seconds cannot be set. After setting the  
minute, press the [SET UP] button according to the time  
signal.  
• To cancel date/time setting, press the [RETURN] button.  
Doing so cancels date/time setting and returns to the initial  
screen.  
• The year can be set from 2009 to 2037.  
If "2037.12.31 PM11:59" is set, the time will change to  
"2009.1.1 AM00:00" after one minute.  
5'672  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢁ&+52.#;  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6  
&#6'ꢀ&+52.#;  
/106*ꢄ&#;ꢄ;'#4  
ꢂꢃ*  
6+/'ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ%*1+%'  
Changing the date display style  
You can specify the display style of the date as follows.  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
4'6740  
5'672  
1 Press the [SET UP] button on the remote control  
unit  
5 Select the date display style.  
2 Select “SETUP”, and press the [OK] button  
• The Settings menu screen appears.  
5'672  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢁ&+52.#;  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6  
;'#4ꢄ/106*ꢄ&#;  
5'672  
&#6'ꢀ&+52.#;  
/106*ꢄ&#;ꢄ
/106*ꢄ&#;ꢄ;'#4  
6+/'ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ%*1+%'  
ꢂꢃ*  
#761ꢀ219'4ꢀꢁ1((ꢂ  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀ%1&'  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢄ&+52.#;  
2#0'.ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ$4+)*60'55  
37+%-ꢀ56#4672  
1((  
&#;ꢄ/106*ꢄ;'#4  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀꢃ  
1((  
$7<<'4ꢀ176276  
&'(#7.6ꢀ5'66+0)  
5QHVYCTGꢀ8GTUKQPꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀZZZZZꢅZZZZZꢅZZZZZ  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
5'672  
4'6740  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
5'672  
4'6740  
• Select a date display style from the following items.  
YEAR.MONTH.DAY : Displays the date in the year/month/day  
order.  
MONTH.DAY.YEAR : Displays the date in the month/day/year  
order.  
DAY.MONTH.YEAR : Displays the date in the day/month/year  
order.  
6 After selecting, press the [OK] button  
• The date display style will be saved.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation  
4 Select “TIME DISPLAY CHOICE”, and press the  
Setting and Displaying  
Date/Time (Continued)  
[OK] button  
5 The Time Display menu screen appears  
Memo:  
• The date display style will be applied in the following  
5'672  
information displays.  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢁ&+52.#;  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6  
• Recording date of the title that is shown in the playback  
navigation screen (The recording date will be shown in  
place of the title if the title has not been input).  
&#6'ꢀ&+52.#;  
/106*ꢄ&#;ꢄ;'#4  
ꢂꢃ*  
6+/'ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ%*1+%'  
• Shooting date and time that is shown when AVCHD is  
played back  
• Date that is displayed in the title information display  
screen  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
4'6740  
5'672  
Changing the time display style  
You can specify the display style of the time as follows.  
6 Select the time display style  
1 Press the [SET UP] button on the remote control  
unit  
5'672  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢁ&+52.#;  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6  
2 Select “SETUP”, and press the [OK] button  
• The Settings menu screen appears.  
&#6'ꢀ&+52.#;  
/106*ꢄ&#;ꢄ
ꢂꢃ*  
ꢂꢃ*  
ꢃꢅ*  
6+/'ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ%*1+%'  
5'672  
#761ꢀ219'4ꢀꢁ1((ꢂ  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀ%1&'  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢄ&+52.#;  
2#0'.ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ$4+)*60'55  
37+%-ꢀ56#4672  
1((  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀꢃ  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
5'672  
1((  
4'6740  
$7<<'4ꢀ176276  
&'(#7.6ꢀ5'66+0)  
Select from “12H” or “24H”.  
5QHVYCTGꢀ8GTUKQPꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀZZZZZꢅZZZZZꢅZZZZZ  
12H : Displays the time in AM/PM format.  
24H : Displays the time in 24-hour format.  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
7 After selecting, press the [OK] button  
5'672  
4'6740  
• The time display style will be saved.  
3 Select “CLOCK SET/DISPLAY”, and press the  
[OK] button  
• The Clock Set/Display menu screen appears.  
Memo:  
• The time display style applies to the following.  
• Current time  
• Date/time registered on the disc  
• Recording time of the title that is shown in the playback  
navigation screen  
(The recording time will be shown in place of the title if  
the title has not been input.)  
5'672  
#761ꢀ219'4ꢀꢁ1((ꢂ  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀ%1&'  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢄ&+52.#;  
2#0'.ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ$4+)*60'55  
37+%-ꢀ56#4672  
1((  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀꢃ  
• Shooting date and time that is displayed when AVCHD is  
1((  
played back  
$7<<'4ꢀ176276  
&'(#7.6ꢀ5'66+0)  
• Time of recording that is displayed in the title information  
display screen  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
5'672  
4'6740  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing/Importing  
o
Importing data from a SDHC/SD to the HDD  
Dubbing/Importing  
Bi-directional dubbing between the HDD and a BD/DVD is  
possible using this unit alone. Also, data can be imported to  
the HDD from a video camera by connecting it via i.LINK or  
USB.  
Videos captured using a video camera can be imported to  
the HDD by inserting the SDHC/SD card that the videos are  
saved on.  
o
Importing data from a video camera to the  
HDD  
Videos captured using a video camera can be imported to the  
HDD.  
This unit supports video camera connections via i.LINK and  
USB.  
Dubbing from the HDD to a BD/DVD  
o
High-speed dubbing  
Select this option if you want to significantly shorten the  
time required for dubbing. Make use of a BD/DVD disc that  
supports high-speed recording.  
Memo:  
o
Dubbing in a specific recording mode  
Select this option when you want to specify the recording  
mode for dubbing. Dubbing can be performed in the recording  
mode of your preference, such as whether to "maintain a high  
picture quality" or "save as many titles as possible".  
For more details, refer to "Recording Modes" (A page 28) .  
Memo:  
• The image quality will not improve even when a recording  
mode with image quality higher than that of the original  
recording mode is chosen.  
• Dubbing using a specific recording mode will cause the disc  
to be re-encoded.  
Other options for importing data into the  
HDD  
o
Importing data from a BD/DVD to the HDD  
You can import titles from a BD/DVD.  
o
Importing data from a video deck  
You can import data to the HDD from an external video deck  
by connecting it to a composite video or S input terminal.  
For more details, refer to "Recording Using External Inputs"  
(A page 47).  
Memo:  
• Videos that are copy-controlled cannot be imported.  
• Motion JPEG is not supported  
DVD-video*  
: Discs that are not finalized cannot be  
imported.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing/Importing  
Dubbing chart  
o
Dubbing the video data from the HDD  
Dubbing  
Quality  
Format (BD)  
BDMV(HD Quality) BDAV(HD Quality) BDAV(SD Quality) DVD-VR  
Format (DVD)  
DVD-VIDEO  
Content  
Quality  
DR (Other)  
-
High-speed dubbing / Re-encoding  
Re-encoding  
Re-encoding  
Re-encoding  
Re-encoding  
Re-encoding  
Re-encoding  
Re-encoding  
AF/AN/AL/AE  
AVC  
High-speed dubbing  
High-speed dubbing / Re-encoding  
Re-encoding  
High-speed dubbing  
High-speed dubbing / Re-encoding  
Re-encoding  
FR  
-
-
-
Re-encoding  
High-speed dubbing / Re-encoding  
Re-encoding  
XP/SP/LP/EP*  
-
Re-encoding  
High-speed dubbing / High-speed dubbing /  
Re-encoding  
Re-encoding  
Memo:  
EP* : High-speed dubbing to DVD-VIDEO format discs in EP mode title  
To perform high-speed dubbing of a EP mode title to a DVD-VIDEO format disc, set " HIGH-SPEED DUBBING " (A  
page 77) in the settings menu to “4:3” before recording or importing. Only re-encoding will be performed when dubbing a  
title that is recorded or imported with a setting other than “4:3”.  
o
Dubbing the picture data from the HDD  
Importing file  
Media  
(HDD)  
BDAV(BD-RE) SDHC/SD  
JPEG  
X
X
Memo:  
• Video images may be distorted in the following situations during reencoding/dubbing when the monitor (TV) is connected to  
this unit using a HDMI cable, or when the screen resolution is set to 1080p.  
• Proceeding with dubbing from the menu screen  
• Returning to the normal screen after dubbing has finished  
• This is not a malfunction. Change the screen resolution to a setting other than 1080p if you feel that this is annoying.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing/Importing  
Formatting a disc  
1 Set the DVD or BD to be formatted on the disc  
Formatting  
Unused discs or SD cards may require formatting in some  
cases.  
tray  
2 Press the [MEDIA MANAGE] button on the remote  
control unit  
• The Media Management menu screen appears.  
When the need arises, format the disc or SD card accordingly.  
Memo:  
• Formatting a disc or SD card erases all existing data from  
the media.  
Double-check carefully before formatting so as not to erase  
important titles.  
• When using a DVD-R disc in the Video mode, formatting is  
/'&+#ꢀ/#0#)'/'06  
$&ꢁ&8&  
(14/#6  
not required.  
(+0#.+<'  
4'0#/'ꢀ&+5%  
5&ꢀ%#4&  
Format chart  
Refer to the following chart for the disc types and format when  
formatting a disc.  
(14/#6  
$&ꢂ8+&'1ꢀ&#6#ꢀ'4#5'  
*&&  
(14/#6  
Note:  
• Using a disc formated on another device could cause read  
errors even though it corresponds to the chart below.  
In this case, we recommend that you format the disc with  
this unit or use another blank disc.  
3 Select “FORMAT” from “BD/DVD”  
DVD  
: A format selection screen appears.  
BD  
: A confirmation screen to execute formatting  
appears.  
Memo:  
• BD-R and DVD-R discs can only be formatted once.  
4 Select a format mode from the format selection  
• When a disc is re-formatted into another format, remove the  
disc and load it again.  
screen  
o
DVD format chart  
Format  
VR  
Video  
Format  
Format  
%10(+4/  
DVD-RW Single-sided, single  
layer (4.7 GB)  
X
X
X
X
6*'ꢀ&+5%ꢀ9+..ꢀ$'ꢀ(14/#66'&  
5'.'%6ꢀ#ꢀ(14/#6ꢀ/1&'  
84ꢀ/1&'  
8+&'1ꢀ/1&'  
DVD-R  
Single-sided, single  
layer (4.7 GB)  
(*)  
(*)  
X
X
Single-sided, dual layer  
(8.5 GB)  
: Format supported.  
* : Formatting not required.  
X
DVD-RW : Select a "Format mode" from “VR MODE” or  
“VIDEO MODE”.  
o
Memo:  
BD format chart  
• This screen does not appear when a BD or DVD-R disc is  
used.  
Format  
BD-RE Single-sided, single layer (25 GB)  
Single-sided, dual layer (50 GB)  
X
X
X
X
BD-R  
Single-sided, single layer (25 GB)  
Single-sided, dual layer (50 GB)  
: Format supported.  
X
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing/Importing  
o
Cancel formatting  
Formatting (Continued)  
5 Select “YES”, and press the [OK] button in the  
Memo:  
1 Press the [OPTION] button while formatting  
format confirmation screen  
126+105  
$#%-  
5612  
%10(+4/  
6*'ꢀ&+5%ꢀ9+..ꢀ$'ꢀ(14/#66'&ꢀ+0ꢀ:::  
#..ꢀ4'%14&'&ꢀ6+6.'5ꢀ9+..ꢀ$'ꢀ'4#5'&  
+6ꢀ6#-'5ꢀ#$176ꢀ;;;ꢀ/+076'5  
&1ꢀ;17ꢀ9#06ꢀ61ꢀ(14/#6!  
;'5  
01  
(14/#6  
;17ꢃ%#0ꢃ':+6ꢃ(41/ꢃ6*'ꢃ126+10ꢃ5%4''0  
2 Select “STOP” and press the [OK] button  
• A confirmation screen to stop formatting appears.  
• Formatting starts.  
3 Select “YES” on the confirmation screen and  
• After formatting is complete, a “THE DISC HAS BEEN  
FORMATTED” message appears on the monitor, and the  
normal screen is displayed.  
press the [OK] button  
%10(+4/  
(14/#66+0)ꢂ9+..ꢂ$'ꢂ56122'&  
5612!  
%10(+4/  
;'5  
01  
6*'ꢀ&+5%ꢀ*#5ꢀ$''0ꢀ(14/#66'&  
1-  
(14/#6  
ꢀꢀꢁ  
;17ꢂ%#0ꢂ':+6ꢂ(41/ꢂ6*'ꢂ126+10ꢂ5%4''0  
• Formatting is stopped.  
Note:  
Memo:  
• Formatting can be stopped if it seems to take a long time  
(more than two minutes).  
• If for any reason formatting cannot be stopped, the  
confirmation screen for stopping formatting will not appear  
even if the [OPTION] button is pressed.  
• To return to the initial screen without formatting the disc,  
select “DO NOT FORMAT” and press the [OK] button.  
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to return  
to the initial screen without formatting.  
Note:  
• Do not turn off the power or unplug the power cable when  
the "FORMATTING DISC…" message is displayed.  
• Note that formatting a disc with copyright-protected titles  
erases all the titles from the disc.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing/Importing  
4 Select “YES”, and press the [OK] button  
Formatting an SD Card  
1 Insert the SD card to be formatted into the [SD  
SLOT]  
• With the terminal side facing down, insert the SD card until  
a “click” sound is heard.  
%10(+4/  
6*'ꢀ%#4&̉5ꢀ%106'06ꢀ9+..ꢀ$'ꢀ'4#5'&ꢀꢁ  
&1ꢀ;17ꢀ9#06ꢀ61ꢀ56#46ꢀ(14/#66'&ꢀ!  
;'5  
01  
• Formatting starts.  
Note:  
• After formatting is complete, a “THE SD CARD HAS BEEN  
FORMATTED” message appears on the monitor, and the  
normal screen is displayed.  
• Formatting cannot be performed if the SD card is write-  
protected. In this case, turn off the write-protect lock before  
inserting the SD card.  
Memo:  
• To return to the initial screen without formatting the disc,  
select “NO” and press the [OK] button.  
Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to return  
to the initial screen without formatting.  
2 Press the [MEDIA MANAGE] button on the remote  
control unit  
• The Media Management menu screen appears.  
Note:  
• Do not turn off the power or unplug the power cable when  
the “FORMATTING SD CARD…” message is displayed. Do  
not remove the SD card as well. Doing so may damage the  
SD card.  
/'&+#ꢀ/#0#)'/'06  
$&ꢁ&8&  
(14/#6  
(+0#.+<'  
4'0#/'ꢀ&+5%  
5&ꢀ%#4&  
• Note that formatting a disc with copyright-protected titles  
erases all the titles from the disc.  
(14/#6  
• Once the formatting of the SD card begins, it cannot be  
stopped.  
$&ꢂ8+&'1ꢀ&#6#ꢀ'4#5'  
*&&  
(14/#6  
3 Select “FORMAT” from “SD CARD”  
• A confirmation screen to execute formatting appears.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing/Importing  
Recording Modes  
Maximum recording time for each recording mode  
You can specify a recording mode according to the intended use. Setting the video to a high picture quality shortens the  
maximum recording time, while setting to a lower picture quality lengthens the recording time.  
Refer to the following table for the maximum recording time in the respective modes. All figures shown in the table are  
approximate values.  
Recording  
Mode  
Quality  
HD  
BD (Single-  
sided, Single  
Layer)  
BD (Single-  
sided, Dual  
Layer)  
DVD (Single-  
sided, Single  
Layer)  
DVD (Single-  
sided, Dual  
Layer)  
HDD (500 GB)  
DR  
AF  
AN  
AL  
AE  
XP  
SP  
LP  
EP  
-
-
-
-
40 hours (*1)  
80 hours  
4 hours  
8 hours  
-
-
6 hours  
12 hours  
18 hours  
24 hours  
10.5 hours  
21 hours  
42 hours  
84 hours  
-
-
126 hours  
189 hours  
252 hours  
110 hours  
222 hours  
442 hours  
887 hours  
9 hours  
-
-
12 hours  
5.25 hours  
10.5 hours  
21 hours  
42 hours  
-
-
SD  
1 hours  
2 hours  
4 hours  
8 hours  
1.7 hours  
3.5 hours  
7.1 hours  
14.3 hours  
*1 : An estimated figure when HDV is imported.  
Memo:  
• DR mode  
Abbreviation for Direct Recording. Videos are recorded in the original picture quality.  
• AF/AN/XP/SP mode  
Recommended for recording images with fast motion, such as sports videos.  
• The AF/AN mode record images at the high-quality HD level.  
• The XP/SP modes record images at the high-quality SD level.  
• AL/AE/LP mode  
Recommended for recording images with slow motion and little contrast, such as dramas.  
• AL/AE mode records images at the low-quality HD level.  
• LP mode records images at the low-quality SD level.  
• EP mode  
Recommended for recording images with sharp outlines, such as animation videos, and when the recordable time (remaining  
time) is limited.  
HD picture quality  
• Using BD enables dubbing to be done with HD picture  
quality. To dub HD picture quality titles that are imported in  
the HDD, use BD.  
FR mode  
FR mode is displayed as the recording mode in the following  
cases.  
• FR mode during import into HDD  
During import of SD-VIDEO titles via high-speed dubbing.  
During import of data via high-speed dubbing from DVD-VR  
discs recorded using other units.  
Note:  
• Dubbing to a DVD cannot be done in HD picture quality.  
• FR mode during dubbing from HDD  
When selecting the most appropriate mode automatically  
between XP and EP according to the remaining memory on  
the disc.  
DR mode  
• HDV and SD-VIDEO titles are imported using DR mode.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing/Importing  
2 Press the [ONE TOUCH DUBBING] button on the  
Importing Data to the HDD  
Using the ONE TOUCH  
DUBBING Button  
Titles can be imported to the HDD from an SD card or device  
connected to the USB or i.LINK terminal simply by pressing  
the [ONE TOUCH DUBBING] button.  
unit  
• One-touch importing starts.  
• File formats that can be imported  
A USB connection device, SD card  
AVCHD, SD-VIDEO, and JPEG  
B i.LINK-connected device  
DV and HDV content  
Memo:  
• Refer to the following for the flow of operations by the  
system of this unit.  
Memo:  
• Data is searched according to the order of priority listed  
below when multiple devices are connected to this unit.  
USB h SD card h i.LINK  
Data is retrieved only from the first device and imported to  
the HDD. Connect only the device that contains data you  
want to import to the HDD.  
3 System checks the device connection  
• The system of this unit detects the connected device.  
Search for devices is performed in the sequence of USB,  
SD card, followed by i.LINK.  
4 System detects the titles to import  
The i.LINK connected device can only be used to import  
from tape media.  
• All video files (scenes) imported using “ONE TOUCH  
DUBBING” are combined into one title.  
This unit does not support combining of titles during the  
editing operation after import is complete. To combine and  
import data, select “ONE TOUCH DUBBING”.  
• All titles that can be imported will be detected and imported.  
5 Importing of titles by this unit starts  
6 After titles are successfully imported, a  
“DUBBING IS COMPLETED” message appears  
on the monitor  
• Titles of two or more scenes cannot be combined if the  
recording criteria, such as video size, are different.  
• When importing DV contents with shooting date/time  
information, the date/time information at the beginning  
of the contents will be taken as the shooting date/time  
information. For HDV contents or DV contents without  
shooting date/time information, the importing date/time will  
be taken as the shooting date/time information.  
%10(+4/  
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&  
1-  
Note:  
•
Do not unplug the cable while importing to the HDD is in progress.  
Doing so may result in loss or damage of the titles.  
• Only titles that are not copyright-protected can be imported.  
Memo:  
• Recognizing the device and importing the files may take a long  
time depending on the amount of files in the device or media.  
• The following buttons are enabled when importing is in  
progress.  
o
Procedure for one-touch importing  
[
]
: Continues importing while switching this unit  
to the Standby mode.  
A
1 Connect the device to be used. Alternatively,  
[ONE TOUCH : Press this button for three seconds or longer  
DUBBING]  
[OPTION]  
insert an SD card.  
to cancel importing.  
: Displays a pop-up menu for canceling  
importing.  
• Once preparations for importing have been done, the  
message below will be shown on this unit’s display window.  
i.LINK device : "HDV/DV RDY"  
USB device : "USB RDY"  
SD card  
[ON SCREEN] : Pressing this button each time displays or  
hides the importing information.  
: "SD RDY"  
Note:  
• Importing stops and a message appears on the monitor if  
an error occurs during the importing process.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing/Importing  
Full import  
1 Select “FULL IMPORT” in the import selection  
screen, and press the [OK] button  
Importing Data from a BD/  
DVD to the HDD  
Data can be imported from a BD/DVD to the HDD as follows.  
• File formats that can be imported  
• A check mark is added to the “FULL IMPORT” item.  
2 Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
BD-MV, BD-AV, AVCHD, DVD-VR, DVD-VIDEO, and JPEG  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
Memo:  
• Titles that are imported using “FULL IMPORT” combined  
into one title.  
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ/'6*1&ꢀ1(ꢀ+/2146  
This unit does not support combining of titles during the  
editing operation after import is complete. To combine and  
import data, select “FULL IMPORT”.  
&+5%  
*&&  
(7..ꢀ+/2146  
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ8+&'1ꢃ  
• For data that is selected for import via “SEL.  
TITLE(VIDEO)”, titles with the same date are combined.  
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ2+%674'ꢃ  
• Titles of two or more scenes cannot be combined if the  
recording criteria, such as video size, are different.  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
Note:  
• Only titles that are not copyright-protected can be imported.  
• Recognizing the device and importing the files may take a  
long time depending on the amount of files in the device.  
• “START” will appear instead of “NEXT” in the menu if the  
disc is of a format other than "BD-AV". In this case, go to  
Step 5.  
3 Select “RECORDING MODE”, and press the [OK]  
button  
• A pop-up menu appears.  
o
Preparations  
1 Set a BD or DVD on the disc tray  
2 Press the [DUBBING] button on the remote  
control unit  
4 Select the “RECORDING MODE” option  
• The importing screen appears.  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
5'6ꢀ6*'ꢀ4'%14&+0)ꢀ/1&'  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
&+5%  
*&&  
52  
5'.'%6ꢁ+/2146ꢀ&7$$+0)  
61ꢁ*&&  
75$  
61ꢁ&8&  
&+5%  
4'%14&+0)ꢀ/1&'  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
8+&'1  
5&  
&+5%ꢀ5&  
2+%674'  
&+5%  
*&8ꢀ&8  
&+5%ꢁ%12;  
&+5%  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
56#46  
&+5%  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
%#0%'.  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
For more details, refer to "Recording Modes" (A page 28) .  
3 Select "DISC HDD" in the importing screen, and  
h
press the [OK] button  
• A check mark is added to the "DISChHDD" item.  
4 Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
• The import selection screen appears.  
Memo:  
• A recording mode selection appears instead of the import  
selection screen when DVD-VIDEO is detected.  
For more details, refer to "Importing DVD-VIDEO" (A page  
32) .  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing/Importing  
5 Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
• Importing of the titles starts.  
3 Select “RECORDING MODE”, and press the [OK]  
button  
• A pop-up menu appears.  
• After titles are successfully imported, a “DUBBING IS  
COMPLETED” message appears on the monitor.  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
5'6ꢀ6*'ꢀ4'%14&+0)ꢀ/1&'  
&+5%  
*&&  
52  
%10(+4/  
4'%14&+0)ꢀ/1&'  
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&  
1-  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
4 Select the “RECORDING MODE” option.  
For more details, refer to "Recording Modes" (A page 28) .  
Specify a title  
5 Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
• A screen for creating the import title list appears.  
1 Select “SEL. TITLE(VIDEO)” in the import  
selection screen, and press the [OK] button  
• A check mark is added to the “SEL. TITLE(VIDEO)” item.  
6 Create an import title list  
• Follow the steps below to create an import title list.  
A Select “ADD TITLE LIST FOR DUBBING”, and press  
the [OK] button  
2 Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
The Title List screen is displayed.  
B Select the titles to import, and press the [OK] button  
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ/'6*1&ꢀ1(ꢀ+/2146  
Titles selected are added to the list.  
&+5%  
*&&  
Memo:  
• Press the [MARK] button. A check mark will appear beside  
the title.  
(7..ꢀ+/2146  
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ8+&'1ꢃ  
All titles with a check mark can be added to the list at the  
same time.  
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ2+%674'ꢃ  
• Select a title from the dubbing title list, and press the [OK]  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
button to perform the following changes.  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
• Delete the selected title from the list  
• Thumbnails may not be displayed during title selection  
depending on the discs used.  
• If a "BD-AV" disc is set, a recording mode selection screen  
will appear.  
• If the disc is of a format other than "BD-AV", a screen for  
creating an import title list will appear. Go to step 5.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing/Importing  
1 Select “RECORDING MODE”, press the [OK]  
button, and select “RECORDING MODE” from the  
recording mode selection screen  
Importing Data from a BD/  
DVD to the HDD  
• Select the “RECORDING MODE” option.  
(Continued)  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
7 Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
5'6ꢀ6*'ꢀ4'%14&+0)ꢀ/1&'  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
&+5%  
*&&  
52  
2.'#5'ꢂ%4'#6'ꢂ#ꢂ6+6.'ꢂ.+56ꢂ(14ꢂ+/2146  
&+5%  
*&&  
4'%14&+0)ꢀ/1&'  
#$%  
5RQTVUꢀꢀ  
%QQMKPIꢁꢁꢁ  
-+&5ꢂ914.&  
0GYUꢂ###  
4GRQTV  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
56#46  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
(.19'4ꢂ.'5510ꢂꢃ  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
#&&ꢂ6+6.'ꢂ.+56ꢂ(14ꢂ&7$$+0)  
$#%-  
%#0%'.  
56#46  
For more details, refer to "Recording Modes" (A page 28) .  
5'.'%6  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
126+10  
4'6740  
2 Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
• Importing of the titles starts.  
• After titles are successfully imported, a “DUBBING IS  
COMPLETED” message appears on the monitor.  
• Importing of titles starts according to the sequence in the  
created title list.  
• After titles are successfully imported, a “DUBBING IS  
COMPLETED” message appears on the monitor.  
%10(+4/  
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&  
%10(+4/  
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&  
1-  
1-  
Memo:  
• If the first play setting of the DVD-video has been set to top  
menu or other settings, the title will not playback.  
If playback does not start, press the play button or playback  
the DVD-Video.  
Note:  
• “START” cannot be selected for the following cases.  
• A title that cannot be dubbed has been selected  
• HDD memory is insufficient  
• The amount of titles in the HDD has reached the  
maximum amount  
• A dubbing title list has not been created  
Canceling importing  
o
To cancel importing before it starts  
• Select “CANCEL” from the menu, and press the [OK] button  
to cancel importing of a title.  
• Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
importing and return to the initial screen.  
Importing DVD-VIDEO  
When DVD-VIDEO is detected, a recording mode selection  
screen appears.  
Follow the steps below to import DVD-VIDEO to the HDD.  
o
To cancel importing while it is in progress  
• Press the [OPTION] button to display the pop-up menu.  
Select “CANCEL” from the pop-up menu and press the [OK]  
button. Data will be written onto the disc up to the point  
where import is cancelled.  
• Importing will also be stopped when the [ ] button is  
o
pressed to stop playback.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing/Importing  
o
Preparations  
Importing Data from a USB-  
compatible Device to the  
HDD  
1 Connect the USB device to this unit using a USB  
cable  
Data on devices connected to the USB terminal can be  
imported to the HDD as follows.  
HDD  
REC  
BV  
REC  
SD  
REC  
MODE  
INPUT  
SELECT  
MIDIA SELECT  
BD/SD  
ONE TOUCH  
DUBBING  
HDD  
• File formats that can be imported  
AVCHD, SD-VIDEO, and JPEG  
HDV/DV IN  
Memo:  
• Titles that are imported using “FULL IMPORT” combined  
into one title. This unit does not support combining of titles  
during the editing operation after import is complete. To  
combine and import data, select “FULL IMPORT”.  
• For data that is selected for import via “SEL.  
TITLE(VIDEO)”, titles with the same date are combined.  
Memo:  
• After connecting the USB cable, turn on the camera and  
switch the mode of the camera.  
(Choose "Connect to a computer" or a similar option. For  
details refer to the camera’s instruction manual.)  
• “USB RDY” appears on the display window of the unit when  
an USB device is recognized.  
• Titles of two or more scenes cannot be combined if the  
recording criteria, such as video size, are different.  
Note:  
• Turn off the power for this unit and the connecting device if  
an USB compatible device is to be connected to this unit.  
• Do not unplug the USB cable while importing a title.  
Doing so may result in loss or damage of the titles.  
• Only titles that are not copyright-protected can be imported.  
2 Press the [DUBBING] button on the remote  
control unit  
• Recognizing the device and importing the files may take  
a long time depending on the amount of files in the USB  
device.  
• The importing screen appears.  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
• If a USB connection is used, this unit will only recognize  
one device out of all the recording devices.  
Depending on the video camera, the memory card slot will  
be recognized but the internal device will not be recognized.  
Use the following methods to solve this.  
• If the internal device is not recognized:  
Copy the data from the camera’s internal memory or HDD  
onto the SD card.  
• If the target device is not recognized using the USB  
connection, use the camcorder's burner or a similar device  
to dub the disc before proceeding with dubbing on this unit.  
For more details, refer to "Importing Data from a BD/DVD to  
the HDD" (A page 30) .  
• When importing videos from a USB-connected camcorder,  
data reading from the internal memory of the camcorder  
may fail. If both the camcorder’s internal memory and SD  
card are available, the SD card may be detected first. To  
prevent this from occurring, remove the SD card before  
reading data from the internal memory.  
5'.'%6ꢁ+/2146ꢀ&7$$+0)  
61ꢁ*&&  
75$  
61ꢁ&8&  
&+5%  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
8+&'1  
5&  
&+5%ꢀ5&  
2+%674'  
&+5%  
*&8ꢀ&8  
&+5%ꢁ%12;  
&+5%  
&+5%  
%#0%'.  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
3 Select "USB HDD" in the importing screen, and  
h
press the [OK] button  
• A check mark is added to the "USBhHDD" item.  
4 Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
• The import selection screen appears.  
Full import  
1 Select “FULL IMPORT” in the import selection  
screen, and press the [OK] button  
• A check mark is added to the “FULL IMPORT” item.  
2 Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ/'6*1&ꢀ1(ꢀ+/2146  
75$  
*&&  
(7..ꢀ+/2146  
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ8+&'1ꢃ  
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ2+%674'ꢃ  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
56#46  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing/Importing  
4 Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
Importing Data from a USB-  
compatible Device to the  
HDD (Continued)  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
2.'#5'ꢄ%4'#6'ꢄ#ꢄ6+6.'ꢄ.+56ꢄ(14ꢄ+/2146  
75$  
*&&  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢆꢁꢄ2/ꢆꢆꢇꢁꢁ  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢆꢁꢄ2/ꢆꢁꢇꢈꢁ  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢆꢁꢄ2/ꢆꢁꢇꢁꢁ  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢄꢂꢄ#/ꢄꢂꢇꢈꢁ  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢄꢂꢄ#/ꢄꢂꢇꢁꢁ  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢄꢂꢄ#/ꢄꢅꢇꢈꢁ  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢄꢂꢄ#/ꢄꢅꢇꢁꢁ  
• Importing of the titles starts.  
• After titles are successfully imported, a “DUBBING IS  
COMPLETED” message appears on the monitor.  
#&&ꢄ6+6.'ꢄ.+56ꢄ(14ꢄ&7$$+0)  
$#%-  
%#0%'.  
56#46  
5'.'%6  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
126+10  
4'6740  
%10(+4/  
• Importing of titles starts according to the sequence in the  
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&  
created title list.  
1-  
• After titles are successfully imported, a “DUBBING IS  
COMPLETED” message appears on the monitor.  
%10(+4/  
Specify a title  
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&  
1 Select “SEL. TITLE(VIDEO)” in the import  
selection screen, and press the [OK] button  
• A check mark is added to the “SEL. TITLE(VIDEO)” item.  
1-  
2 Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
Note:  
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ/'6*1&ꢀ1(ꢀ+/2146  
• “START” cannot be selected for the following cases.  
75$  
*&&  
• A title that cannot be dubbed has been selected  
• HDD memory is insufficient  
(7..ꢀ+/2146  
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ8+&'1ꢃ  
• The amount of titles in the HDD has reached the  
maximum amount  
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ2+%674'ꢃ  
• A dubbing title list has not been created  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
Canceling importing  
• A screen for creating the import title list appears.  
o
To cancel importing before it starts  
3 Create an import title list  
• Select “CANCEL” from the menu, and press the [OK] button  
• Follow the steps below to create an import title list.  
A Select “ADD TITLE LIST FOR DUBBING”, and press  
the [OK] button  
to cancel importing of a title.  
• Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
importing and return to the initial screen.  
The Title List screen is displayed.  
B Select the titles to import, and press the [OK] button  
o
To cancel importing while it is in progress  
• Press the [OPTION] button. Select “CANCEL” from the  
Cancel Importing menu, and press the [OK] button. Doing  
so imports data to the HDD up to the position where you  
have chosen to stop.  
Titles selected are added to the list.  
Memo:  
• Press the [MARK] button. A check mark will appear beside  
the title.  
All titles with a check mark can be added to the list at the  
same time.  
• You can perform the following editing operations by  
selecting a title from the dubbing title list and pressing the  
[OK] button.  
• Delete the selected title from the list  
• Thumbnails will not be displayed when a title is selected.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing/Importing  
3 Select "SD HDD" in the importing screen, and  
press the [OK] button  
• A check mark is added to the "SDhHDD" item.  
h
Importing Data from an SD  
Card to the HDD  
Data can be imported from a SD (SDHC) card to the HDD as  
follows.  
4 Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
• The import selection screen appears.  
• File formats that can be imported  
AVCHD, SD-VIDEO, and JPEG  
Full import  
1 Select “FULL IMPORT” in the import selection  
screen, and press the [OK] button  
• A check mark is added to the “FULL IMPORT” item.  
Memo:  
• Titles that are imported using “FULL IMPORT” combined  
into one title. This unit does not support combining of titles  
during the editing operation after import is complete. To  
combine and import data, select “FULL IMPORT”.  
2 Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
• For data that is selected for import via “SEL.  
TITLE(VIDEO)”, titles with the same date are combined.  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ/'6*1&ꢀ1(ꢀ+/2146  
• Titles of two or more scenes cannot be combined if the  
recording criteria, such as video size, are different.  
5&  
*&&  
Note:  
• Do not remove the SD card when importing of the titles is in  
progress or when the importing screen is displayed.  
Doing so may result in loss or damage of the titles.  
(7..ꢀ+/2146  
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ8+&'1ꢃ  
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ2+%674'ꢃ  
• Only titles that are not copyright-protected can be imported.  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
56#46  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
o
Preparations  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
1 Insert the SD (SDHC) card into the [SD SLOT]  
• Importing of the titles starts.  
• After titles are successfully imported, a “DUBBING IS  
COMPLETED” message appears on the monitor.  
%10(+4/  
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&  
Memo:  
1-  
• “SD RDY” appears on the display window of the unit when  
an SD card is recognized.  
2 Press the [DUBBING] button on the remote  
control unit  
• The importing screen appears.  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
5'.'%6ꢁ+/2146ꢀ&7$$+0)  
61ꢁ*&&  
75$  
61ꢁ&8&  
&+5%  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
8+&'1  
5&  
&+5%ꢀ5&  
2+%674'  
&+5%  
*&8ꢀ&8  
&+5%ꢁ%12;  
&+5%  
&+5%  
%#0%'.  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
&7$$+0)  
126+10  
4'6740  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing/Importing  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
Importing Data from an SD  
Card to the HDD  
2.'#5'ꢄ%4'#6'ꢄ#ꢄ6+6.'ꢄ.+56ꢄ(14ꢄ+/2146  
5&  
*&&  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢆꢁꢄ2/ꢆꢆꢇꢁꢁ  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢆꢁꢄ2/ꢆꢁꢇꢈꢁ  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢆꢁꢄ2/ꢆꢁꢇꢁꢁ  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢄꢂꢄ#/ꢄꢂꢇꢈꢁ  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢄꢂꢄ#/ꢄꢂꢇꢁꢁ  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢄꢂꢄ#/ꢄꢅꢇꢈꢁ  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂꢃꢄꢅꢃꢄꢂꢄ#/ꢄꢅꢇꢁꢁ  
(Continued)  
Memo:  
• Choose “BACK” from the menu and press the [OK] button  
to return to the previous screen.  
#&&ꢄ6+6.'ꢄ.+56ꢄ(14ꢄ&7$$+0)  
$#%-  
%#0%'.  
56#46  
5'.'%6  
1-  
':+6  
Specify a title  
&7$$+0)  
126+10  
4'6740  
1 Select “SEL. TITLE(VIDEO)” in the import  
selection screen, and press the [OK] button  
• A check mark is added to the “SEL. TITLE(VIDEO)” item.  
• Importing of titles starts according to the sequence in the  
created title list.  
• After titles are successfully imported, a “DUBBING IS  
COMPLETED” message appears on the monitor.  
2 Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ/'6*1&ꢀ1(ꢀ+/2146  
5&  
*&&  
%10(+4/  
(7..ꢀ+/2146  
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ8+&'1ꢃ  
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&  
1-  
5'.ꢁꢀ6+6.'ꢂ2+%674'ꢃ  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
':+6  
1-  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
• A screen for creating the import title list appears.  
Memo:  
3 Create an import title list  
• Choose “BACK” from the menu and press the [OK] button  
to return to the previous screen.  
• Follow the steps below to create an import title list.  
A Select “ADD TITLE LIST FOR DUBBING”, and press  
the [OK] button  
The Title List screen is displayed.  
B Select the titles to import, and press the [OK] button  
Note:  
• “START” cannot be selected for the following cases.  
• A title that cannot be dubbed has been selected  
• HDD memory is insufficient  
• The amount of titles in the HDD has reached the  
maximum amount  
Titles selected are added to the list.  
Memo:  
• Press the [MARK] button. A check mark will appear beside  
• A dubbing title list has not been created  
• Thumbnails will not be displayed when a title is selected.  
the title.  
All titles with a check mark can be added to the list at the  
same time.  
• You can perform the following editing operations by  
selecting a title from the dubbing title list and pressing the  
[OK] button.  
Canceling importing  
o
To cancel importing before it starts  
• Delete the selected title from the list  
• Select “CANCEL” from the menu, and press the [OK] button  
• When there are files of different formats (AVCHD, SD-  
VIDEO) in the SD card, press the [RED] button to select the  
format you want to display.  
to cancel importing of a title.  
• Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
importing and return to the initial screen.  
4 Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
o
To cancel importing while it is in progress  
• Press the [OPTION] button. Select “CANCEL” from the  
Cancel Importing menu, and press the [OK] button. Doing  
so imports data to the HDD up to the position where you  
have chosen to stop.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing/Importing  
2 Press the [DUBBING] button on the remote  
control unit  
• The importing screen appears.  
Importing Data from an  
i.LINK-compatible Device  
to the HDD  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
Data on devices connected to the i.LINK terminal can be  
imported to the HDD as follows.  
5'.'%6ꢁ+/2146ꢀ&7$$+0)  
61ꢁ*&&  
61ꢁ&8&  
&+5%  
• Video formats that can be imported:  
DV and HDV content  
75$  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
8+&'1  
5&  
&+5%ꢀ5&  
2+%674'  
Memo:  
&+5%  
*&8ꢀ&8  
&+5%ꢁ%12;  
&+5%  
• Only titles that are not copyright-protected can be imported.  
• Devices that have in-built copyright protection such as  
D-VHS and digital tuners cannot be connected. This unit  
only allows import from tape media.  
&+5%  
%#0%'.  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
• Importing will not be performed if no tape has been inserted  
into the HDV/DV camera.  
3 Select "HDV/DV HDD" in the importing screen,  
h
• Importing will be cancelled when the mode is changed from  
HDV to DV or vice versa.  
and press the [OK] button  
• For camcorders that support both HDV and DV recording,  
use only one of the modes for recording and playback.  
• There is no support for editing using a connected PC.  
• Only one i.LINK device can be connected to this unit at a time.  
• When importing DV contents with shooting date/time  
information, the date/time information at the beginning  
of the contents will be taken as the shooting date/time  
information. For HDV contents or DV contents without  
shooting date/time information, the importing date/time will  
be taken as the shooting date/time information.  
• A check mark is added to the "HDV/DVhHDD" item.  
4 Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
• The import selection screen appears.  
Imports data from the beginning  
You can import videos from the beginning till the end as  
follows. If the current position is halfway through the tape,  
import after rewinding the tape to the beginning.  
1 Select “IMPORT FROM BEGINNING”, and press  
the [OK] button  
• A check mark is added to the “IMPORT FROM  
Note:  
• Turn off the power for this unit and the connecting device  
when connecting using an i.LINK compatible device.  
BEGINNING” item.  
•
Do not unplug the i.LINK cable while importing to the HDD is in  
progress. Doing so may result in loss or damage of the titles.  
2 Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
o
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
Preparations  
5'.'%6ꢁ6*'ꢁ/'6*1&ꢁ1(ꢁ+/2146  
1 Connect the device (camera, etc.) to this unit  
using an i.LINK cable  
*&8ꢀ&8  
*&&  
+/2146ꢁ(41/ꢁ$')+00+0)  
+/2146ꢁ(41/ꢁ%744'06ꢁ215+6+10  
HDD  
REC  
BV  
REC  
SD  
REC  
INPUT  
MIDIA SELECT  
BD/SD  
ONE TOUCH  
DUBBING  
MODE  
SELECT  
HDD  
HDV/DV IN  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
4'6740  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
• A recording mode selection screen appears.  
Memo:  
• After the device (camera, etc.) has been connected using  
an i.Link cable, turn on the power of the device and switch  
it to playback mode. (refer to the device's (camera, etc.)  
instruction manual for more details.)  
3 Select “RECORDING MODE”, press the [OK]  
button, and select from the pop-up menu  
• “HDV/DV RDY” appears on the display window of the unit  
when an iLINK device is recognized.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing/Importing  
3 Select “RECORDING MODE” and press the [OK]  
button to display the pop-up menu  
• Select "XP", "SP", "LP", or "EP" from the “RECORDING  
Importing Data from an  
i.LINK-compatible Device  
to the HDD (Continued)  
MODE” option.  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
• Select "XP", "SP", "LP", or "EP" from the “RECORDING  
5'6ꢁ6*'ꢁ4'%14&+0)ꢁ/1&'  
MODE” option.  
*&8ꢀ&8  
*&&  
52  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
4'%14&+0)ꢁ/1&'  
5'6ꢁ6*'ꢁ4'%14&+0)ꢁ/1&'  
*&8ꢀ&8  
*&&  
52  
&7$$+0)ꢁ(14ꢁ*&8ꢁ6#2'ꢁ%106'065ꢁꢂꢂ ꢁ&4ꢁ/1&'ꢃꢁ&8ꢁ%106'065ꢁꢂꢂ ꢁ52'%+(+'&ꢁ4'%ꢁ/1&'  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
56#46  
4'%14&+0)ꢁ/1&'  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
':+6  
1-  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
&7$$+0)ꢁ(14ꢁ*&8ꢁ6#2'ꢁ%106'065ꢁꢂꢂ ꢁ&4ꢁ/1&'ꢃꢁ&8ꢁ%106'065ꢁꢂꢂ ꢁ52'%+(+'&ꢁ4'%ꢁ/1&'  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
56#46  
Memo:  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
':+6  
1-  
• HDV contents will be imported in DR mode.  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
For more details, refer to "Recording Modes" (A page 28) .  
Memo:  
4 Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
• Importing of the titles starts.  
• After titles are successfully imported, a “DUBBING IS  
• HDV contents will be imported in DR mode.  
For more details, refer to "Recording Modes" (A page 28) .  
COMPLETED” message appears on the monitor.  
4 Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
• Importing of the titles starts.  
• After titles are successfully imported, a “DUBBING IS  
COMPLETED” message appears on the monitor.  
%10(+4/  
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&  
1-  
%10(+4/  
&7$$+0)ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&  
1-  
Cancel dubbing  
o
To cancel importing before it starts  
• Select “CANCEL” from the menu, and press the [OK] button  
to cancel importing of a title.  
• Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
importing and return to the initial screen.  
Imports data from current position  
You can import videos from the current tape position till the  
end as follows.  
1 Select “IMPORT FROM CURRENT POSITION”,  
o
To cancel importing while it is in progress  
and press the [OK] button  
• A check mark is added to the “IMPORT FROM CURRENT  
POSITION” item.  
• Press the [OPTION] button. Select “CANCEL” from the  
Cancel Importing menu, and press the [OK] button. Doing  
so imports data to the HDD up to the position where you  
have chosen to stop.  
2 Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
5'.'%6ꢁ6*'ꢁ/'6*1&ꢁ1(ꢁ+/2146  
*&8ꢀ&8  
*&&  
+/2146ꢁ(41/ꢁ$')+00+0)  
+/2146ꢁ(41/ꢁ%744'06ꢁ215+6+10  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
4'6740  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
• A recording mode selection screen appears.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing/Importing  
3 On this screen, select “DISC VIDEO”  
i
Dubbing a Title from the  
HDD to a BD/DVD  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
5'.'%6ꢁ+/2146ꢀ&7$$+0)  
61ꢁ*&&  
75$  
Titles stored in the internal HDD can be dubbed to a BD/DVD  
as follows.  
61ꢁ&8&  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
&+5%  
8+&'1  
Memo:  
5&  
&+5%ꢀ5&  
2+%674'  
• Disc types that can be used for dubbing with this unit are:  
BD-RE, BD-R, DVD-RW, and DVD-R.  
&+5%  
*&8ꢀ&8  
&+5%ꢁ%12;  
&+5%  
&+5%  
For more details, refer to "Discs that enable both dubbing and  
playback" (A page 10) .  
%#0%'.  
0':6  
• HD content for which the delete scene operation has been  
applied cannot be dubbed to BDMV. Perform seamless  
conversion before starting a dubbing operation.  
5'.'%6  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
126+10  
4'6740  
• A check mark is added to the “DISCiVIDEO” item.  
For details, refer to "Mode conversion" (A page 73) .  
4 Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
Note:  
• The following high bit-rate files may not meet the Blu-ray  
Disc standards when they are dubbed to a BD.  
• When a BDAV/BDMV disc is created by importing content  
that is captured using another video camera at a peak bit-  
rate that exceeds 28.8 Mbps.  
Memo:  
• Dubbing can also be performed from the Playback  
Navigation screen.  
A Select the titles to dub, and press the [OPTION]  
button  
• If the Blu-ray Disc standards are not met, playback on  
another player may fail. To ensure that the standards are  
satisfied, perform high-speed dubbing after converting  
the recording mode, or perform dubbing by specifying a  
recording mode.  
B Select “DUB”, and press the [OK] button  
C Follow Steps 3 to 4 of "Preparation"  
o
Dubbing titles  
1 Select “RECORDING FORMAT”, and press the  
[OK] button  
Dubbing from the HDD to a BD/DVD  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
o
Preparation  
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ&7$$+0)ꢀ&'6#+.5  
1 Set a BD or DVD on the disc tray  
&+5%  
*&&  
Memo:  
• A message appears on the monitor in the following cases  
where a disc cannot be written to. Take the necessary  
actions according to the message.  
4'%14&+0)ꢀ(14/#6  
4'%14&+0)ꢀ/1&'  
&8&ꢁ8+&'1  
*+)*ꢁ52''&ꢀ&7$$+0)  
• When an incompatible disc type is set  
• When there is insufficient space on the set disc  
• When a finalized disc is set  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
2 Press the [DUBBING] button on the remote  
control unit  
• The Dubbing menu screen appears.  
• Choose a format.  
For more details, refer to "Format chart" (A page 25) .  
2 Select “RECORDING MODE”, and press the [OK]  
button  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ&7$$+0)ꢀ&'6#+.5  
&+5%  
*&&  
4'%14&+0)ꢀ(14/#6  
4'%14&+0)ꢀ/1&'  
&8&ꢁ8+&'1  
*+)*ꢁ52''&ꢀ&7$$+0)  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
• Select “HIGH-SPEED DUBBING” or a recording mode of  
your preference.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing/Importing  
Memo:  
Dubbing a Title from the  
HDD to a BD/DVD  
(Continued)  
• Press the [MARK] button. A check mark will appear beside  
the title.  
All titles with a check mark can be added to the list at the  
same time.  
• You can perform the following editing operations by  
selecting a title from the dubbing title list and pressing the  
[OK] button.  
Memo:  
• High-speed dubbing  
• Delete the selected title from the list  
• Change the list arrangement  
• Change the name of the selected title  
Select this option if you want to significantly shorten the  
time required for dubbing.  
Make use of a disc that supports high-speed recording.  
• AF/AN/AL/AE  
Can be selected for BD-R and BD-RE. Dubbing is done  
with HD picture quality.  
Select “RENAME TITLE”, and press the [OK] button to  
change the title of the dubbing source. Dubbing of the new  
title is performed.  
• XP/SP/LP/EP  
Dubbing is done with SD picture quality.  
5 Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
• FR  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
An appropriate mode will be chosen automatically between  
XP to EP according to the remaining memory on the disc.  
For more details, refer to "Dubbing the video data from the  
%4'#6'ꢂ6+6.'ꢂ.+56ꢂ(14ꢂ&7$$+0)  
&+5%  
*&&  
#$%  
HDD" (A page 24) and "Recording Modes" (A page 28) .  
5RQTVUꢀꢀ  
%QQMKPIꢁꢁꢁ  
-+&5ꢂ914.&  
0GYUꢂ###  
4GRQTV  
3 Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
(.19'4ꢂ.'5510ꢂꢃ  
#&&ꢂ6+6.'ꢂ.+56ꢂ(14ꢂ&7$$+0)  
$#%-  
5'.'%6ꢀ6*'ꢀ&7$$+0)ꢀ&'6#+.5  
%#0%'.  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
126+10  
4'6740  
&+5%  
*&&  
4'%14&+0)ꢀ(14/#6  
4'%14&+0)ꢀ/1&'  
&8&ꢁ8+&'1  
Note:  
*+)*ꢁ52''&ꢀ&7$$+0)  
• “NEXT” cannot be selected for the following cases.  
• A title that cannot be dubbed has been selected  
• Disc memory is insufficient  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
0':6  
• A dubbing title list has not been created  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
Memo:  
• Steps 6 and 7 are not applicable for "BDAV" and "DVD-VR"  
disc formats. Go to step 8.  
• A screen for creating a dubbing title list appears.  
4 Create a dubbing title list  
6 Select a background image for the disc menu  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
'8%%,1*  
67(3  
%4'#6'ꢂ6+6.'ꢂ.+56ꢂ(14ꢂ&7$$+0)  
&+5%  
*&&  
6(/(&7ꢀ7+(ꢀ'8%%,1*ꢀ'(7$,/6  
',6&  
+''  
#$%  
5RQTVUꢀꢀ  
%QQMKPIꢁꢁꢁ  
-+&5ꢂ914.&  
0GYUꢂ###  
4GRQTV  
&+$1*(ꢀ',6&ꢀ0(18ꢀ%$&.*5281'  
6(/(&7ꢀ)520ꢀ'()$8/7ꢀ%$&.*5281'  
),1$/,=(  
),567ꢀ3/$<  
5(3($7  
21  
(.19'4ꢂ.'5510ꢂꢃ  
121(  
2))  
#&&ꢂ6+6.'ꢂ.+56ꢂ(14ꢂ&7$$+0)  
$#%-  
%#0%'.  
0':6  
5(1$0(ꢀ',6&  
5'.'%6  
1-  
':+6  
&$1&(/  
%$&.  
67$57  
&7$$+0)  
126+10  
4'6740  
6(/(&7  
237,21  
2.  
(;,7  
'8%%,1*  
5(7851  
• Follow the steps below to create a dubbing title list.  
A Select “ADD TITLE LIST FOR DUBBING”, and press  
the [OK] button  
• Select a background image for the disc menu from  
"Background".  
• “SELECT FROM DEFAULT BACKGROUND”  
B Select the titles to dub, and press the [OK] button  
A default background set is used for the disc menu.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing/Importing  
Memo:  
8 Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
• The background image of the disc menu can be selected  
(only for DVD-Video and BD-MV).  
'8%%,1*  
67(3  
6(/(&7ꢀ7+(ꢀ'8%%,1*ꢀ'(7$,/6  
7 Set the operations for finalize  
',6&  
+''  
&+$1*(ꢀ',6&ꢀ0(18ꢀ%$&.*5281'  
6(/(&7ꢀ)520ꢀ'()$8/7ꢀ%$&.*5281'  
'8%%,1*  
67(3  
6(/(&7ꢀ7+(ꢀ'8%%,1*ꢀ'(7$,/6  
),1$/,=(  
),567ꢀ3/$<  
5(3($7  
21  
',6&  
+''  
121(  
2))  
&+$1*(ꢀ',6&ꢀ0(18ꢀ%$&.*5281'  
6(/(&7ꢀ)520ꢀ'()$8/7ꢀ%$&.*5281'  
5(1$0(ꢀ',6&  
&$1&(/  
%$&.  
67$57  
6(/(&7  
237,21  
),1$/,=(  
),567ꢀ3/$<  
5(3($7  
21  
2.  
(;,7  
'8%%,1*  
5(7851  
121(  
2))  
5(1$0(ꢀ',6&  
• Dubbing starts. A progress bar is displayed during the  
dubbing process.  
• After dubbing is complete, a “DUBBING IS COMPLETED”  
&$1&(/  
%$&.  
67$57  
6(/(&7  
237,21  
2.  
(;,7  
'8%%,1*  
5(7851  
message appears on the monitor.  
• Finalize will be performed after dubbing if “ON” has been  
set for “FINALIZE”.  
If a BD-MV disc is being dubbed, “OFF” cannot be set for  
“FINALIZE”. And once the BD-MV disc is dubbed the disc  
cannot be rewritten.  
• If a DVD-Video or BD-MV disc is being dubbed, the settings  
for “FIRST PLAY”, “REPEAT” and “RENAME DISC” can be  
changed.  
Memo:  
• Choose “BACK” from the menu and press the [OK] button  
to return to the previous screen.  
o
Cancel dubbing  
To cancel dubbing before it starts  
• Select “CANCEL” from the menu, and press the [OK] button  
to cancel dubbing.  
• Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
A Select “FIRST PLAY”, and select either “NONE”,  
“TOP MENU” or “TITLE 1”  
dubbing and return to the initial screen.  
• “NONE”  
• To discontinue dubbing while it is in progress  
A finalized disc will not be automatically played back  
when it is inserted into another device.  
• Press the [OPTION] button. Select “CANCEL” from the  
Cancel Dubbing menu, and press the [OK] button.  
• “TOP MENU”  
The disc menu will be displayed automatically when a  
finalized disc is inserted into another device.  
Memo:  
• When dubbing to a BD-R or DVD-R, the disc memory will  
be reduced as data will still be written onto the disc up to  
the point where dubbing is discontinued.  
• “TITLE 1”  
The first title on a finalized disc will be played back  
automatically when it is inserted into another device.  
Memo:  
• “NONE” cannot be selected for “FIRST PLAY” for BD-MV.  
B Select “REPEAT”, and choose either “OFF” or “ON”  
• “OFF”  
The disc will stop and the menu will be displayed after all  
the titles are played back.  
• “ON”  
Repeat playback from the first title will start automatically  
after all the titles are played back.  
C Select “RENAME DISC”, and press the [OK] button  
• Change the disc name when finalizing is performed.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing/Importing  
4 Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
Dubbing Still Images from  
the HDD  
Still images stored in the internal HDD can be dubbed to a  
BD-RE or an SD card as follows.  
Memo:  
• A message appears on the monitor when dubbing cannot  
be performed in the following cases. When this occurs,  
replace the disc or SD card with one that is usable.  
• When an incompatible disc or SD card is set  
Memo:  
• When there is insufficient space on the set disc or SD  
card  
• Only “JPEG” still image format is supported.  
For more details, refer to "Dubbing the picture data from the  
• When an unformatted disc or SD card is set  
HDD" (A page 24) .  
For details, refer to "Formatting a disc" (A page 25) or  
"Formatting an SD Card" (A page 27) .  
o
Before dubbing  
5 Select the still images to dub, and press the  
• Dubbing to a disc  
Set the BD-RE for dubbing on the disc tray  
• Dubbing to an SD card  
[MARK] button  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
Insert the SD card to be dubbed into the [SD SLOT]  
%4'#6'ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ.+56ꢀ(14ꢀ&7$$+0)  
)4172  
2CIG  
o
#..  
Dubbing still images  
1 Press the [DUBBING] button on the remote  
control unit  
• The Dubbing menu screen appears.  
2 On this screen, select “DISC/SD PICTURE”  
i
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
5'.'%6  
1-  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
':+6  
)4172  
&7$$+0)  
126+10  
4'6740  
5'.'%6ꢁ+/2146ꢀ&7$$+0)  
61ꢁ*&&  
75$  
61ꢁ&8&  
&+5%  
• Pressing the [MARK] button adds a check mark to the  
selected image.  
All still images with a check mark are dubbed.  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
8+&'1  
5&  
&+5%ꢀ5&  
2+%674'  
&+5%  
*&8ꢀ&8  
Memo:  
&+5%ꢁ%12;  
&+5%  
&+5%  
• To clear the check mark, select the corresponding still  
image, and press the [MARK] button.  
%#0%'.  
0':6  
• Pressing the [OPTION] button displays a pop-up menu.  
The pop-up menu enables you to perform the following  
operations.  
5'.'%6  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
126+10  
4'6740  
BACK  
: Exits the pop-menu and returns to the  
initial screen.  
: Selects all still images within the same  
group.  
3 Select the media to dub to from the media  
selection screen  
• A checkmark will be added to the selected media.  
SELECT ALL  
DESELECT ALL : Clears the selection of all still images  
within the same group.  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
+05'46ꢁ#0&ꢁ5'.'%6ꢁ#ꢁ/'&+#  
Note:  
• A message appears if the selected still images do not fit  
into the disc. Check mark cannot be added to a still image if  
there is insufficient space on the disc.  
*&&  
$&ꢀ4'  
*&&  
5&ꢁ%#4&  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing/Importing  
o
6 Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
Dubbing from the Playback Navigation  
screen  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
Dubbing can also be performed from the Playback Navigation  
screen.  
5'.'%6ꢀꢁ56#46ꢁꢀ61ꢀ$')+0ꢀ&7$$+0)  
&7$$+0)ꢀ56+..ꢀ2+%674'5  
1 Select the still images to dub, and press the  
[OPTION] button  
07/$'4ꢀ1(ꢀ56+..ꢀ2+%674'5ꢀ61ꢀ$'ꢀ&7$$'&ꢂꢀꢃꢃꢃ  
0#8+)#6+10 6+6.' ꢁ6*7/$0#+.ꢂ  
2+%674'  
126+105  
8+&'1  
$#%-  
2.#;  
)4172  
#..  
&'.'6'  
&7$  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
56#46  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
/1&'ꢀ%*#0)'  
'&+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
'&+6ꢀ+0(1  
16*'45  
• Dubbing starts. A progress bar is displayed during the  
dubbing process.  
• After dubbing is complete, a “DUBBING IS COMPLETED”  
message appears on the monitor.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1 2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
Memo:  
• A directory of the following configuration is created in the  
media, and still images are written with file names ranging  
from "PIC_0001.jpg" to "PIC_9999.jpg".  
2 Select “DUB”, and press the [OK] button  
3 Follow steps 3 to 5 of "Dubbing still images"  
Memo:  
• Check marks of still images that appear on the Playback  
navigation screen will remain added to the image on the still  
image selection screen.  
o
Cancel dubbing  
To cancel dubbing before it starts  
• Select “CANCEL” from the menu, and press the [OK] button  
to cancel dubbing.  
• Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
dubbing and return to the initial screen.  
To discontinue dubbing while it is in progress  
• Press the [OPTION] button. Select “CANCEL” from the  
Cancel Dubbing menu, and press the [OK] button.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing/Importing  
Memo:  
Enabling Playback on  
• To cancel the finalizing operation, select “NO” and press the  
[OK] button.  
Other Devices (Finalizing)  
5 Setting the top menu items  
DVD-R and DVD-RW discs may need to be finalized before  
they can be played on other DVD players.  
),1$/,=(  
Memo:  
7+(ꢁ',6&ꢁ:,//ꢁ%(ꢁ),1$/,=('ꢁ72ꢁ(1$%/(ꢁ3/$<%$&.ꢁ21ꢁ27+(5ꢁ'9'ꢁ'(9,&(6  
'9'ꢀ5:ꢁ9LGHR  
• Discs in the Video mode becomes a DVD-Video format with  
a title menu after finalizing.  
&+$1*(ꢁ',6&ꢁ0(18ꢁ%$&.*5281'  
6(/(&7ꢁ)520ꢁ'()$8/7ꢁ%$&.*5281'  
• Discs containing DVD-Video data can be finalized by  
setting the disc operation settings according when the disc  
is inserted into this unit.  
• Recording or editing of the disc will not be possible after it  
is finalized.  
),567ꢁ3/$<  
5(3($7  
723ꢁ0(18  
2))  
),1$/,=(  
'2ꢁ127ꢁ),1$/,=(  
• If a DVD that was recorded using VR mode has been  
finalized, the disc can only be played back on VR mode  
compatible devices.  
6(/(&7  
237,21  
2.  
(;,7  
0(',$ꢁ0$1$*(  
5(7851  
• Before finalizing, set “FIRST PLAY”, “REPEAT”, and  
“CHANGE DISC MENU BACKGROUND” accordingly.  
Set according to the steps below.  
Finalizing  
1 Set the BD or DVD to be finalized on the disc tray  
A Select “FIRST PLAY”, and select an appropriate first  
play setting item  
• This item is used for setting the disc operation when a  
finalized disc is inserted into another device.  
2 Press the [MEDIA MANAGE] button on the remote  
control unit  
• The Media Management menu screen appears.  
NONE  
: A finalized disc will not be automatically  
played back when it is inserted into another  
device.  
/'&+#ꢀ/#0#)'/'06  
TOP MENU : The disc menu will be displayed  
automatically when a finalized disc is  
inserted into another device.  
$&ꢁ&8&  
(14/#6  
(+0#.+<'  
4'0#/'ꢀ&+5%  
5&ꢀ%#4&  
TITLE 1  
: The first title on a finalized disc will be  
played back automatically when it is  
inserted into another device.  
(14/#6  
$&ꢂ8+&'1ꢀ&#6#ꢀ'4#5'  
*&&  
B Select “REPEAT”, and select an appropriate repeat  
(14/#6  
setting item  
• Set the disc action to be taken after all titles have been  
played back.  
OFF : The disc will stop and the menu will be displayed  
after all the titles are played back.  
ON : Repeat playback from the first title will start  
3 Select “FINALIZE” from “BD/DVD”  
4 Select “YES” and press the [OK] button  
• The top menu setting screen appears.  
automatically after all the titles are played back.  
%10(+4/  
&+5%ꢀ9+..ꢀ$'ꢀ(+0#.+<'&ꢀ(14ꢀ2.#;$#%-ꢀ10ꢀ16*'4ꢀ&8&ꢀ&'8+%'5  
+6ꢀ9+..ꢀ6#-'ꢀ#$176ꢀ::ꢀ/+076'5  
;17ꢀ%#0016ꢀ5612ꢀ6*'ꢀ(+0#.+<#6+10ꢀ10%'ꢀ+6ꢀ56#465  
&1ꢀ;17ꢀ9#06ꢀ61ꢀ(+0#.+<'!  
;'5  
01  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing/Importing  
C Select “CHANGE DISC MENU BACKGROUND” to  
Unfinalizing a disc  
select a background image for the top menu  
Only DVD-RW discs that are finalized on this unit can be  
unfinalized.  
• You can register and use a background image of your  
preference.  
After a disc is unfinalized, addition of new titles and editing  
are possible.  
(+0#.+<'  
Note:  
5'.'%6ꢀ#ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ#5ꢀ$#%-)4170&ꢀ&'5+)0ꢀ(14ꢀ6*'ꢀ/'07ꢀ5%4''0  
2CIG  
• All discs except DVD-RW (VR mode) cannot be unfinalized.  
)4172  
#..  
o
To unfinalize a disc  
1 Set a DVD-RW disc that is finalized by this unit  
on the disc tray  
2 Press the [MEDIA MANAGE] button on the remote  
control unit  
• The media management menu screen appears.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
/'&+#ꢀ/#0#)'/'06  
4'6740  
Memo:  
/'&+#ꢀ/#0#)'/'06  
• The items in “FIRST PLAY”, “REPEAT” and “CHANGE  
DISC MENU BACKGROUND” can also be set in "Dubbing  
a Title from the HDD to a BD/DVD" (A page 39) .  
$&ꢁ&8&  
(14/#6  
(+0#.+<'  
4'0#/'ꢀ&+5%  
5&ꢀ%#4&  
6 Select “FINALIZE”, and press the [OK] button  
(14/#6  
),1$/,=(  
$&ꢂ8+&'1ꢀ&#6#ꢀ'4#5'  
*&&  
7+(ꢁ',6&ꢁ:,//ꢁ%(ꢁ),1$/,=('ꢁ72ꢁ(1$%/(ꢁ3/$<%$&.ꢁ21ꢁ27+(5ꢁ'9'ꢁ'(9,&(6  
'9'ꢀ5:ꢁ9LGHR  
(14/#6  
&+$1*(ꢁ',6&ꢁ0(18ꢁ%$&.*5281'  
6(/(&7ꢁ)520ꢁ'()$8/7ꢁ%$&.*5281'  
3 Select “FINALIZE” from “BD/DVD”  
),567ꢁ3/$<  
5(3($7  
723ꢁ0(18  
2))  
4 Select “YES” and press the [OK] button  
FINALIZE  
'2ꢁ127ꢁ),1$/,=(  
6(/(&7  
237,21  
2.  
5(7851  
(;,7  
0(',$ꢁ0$1$*(  
%10(+4/  
• Finalizing starts.  
• After finalization is complete, a “THE DISC HAS BEEN  
FINALIZED” message appears on the monitor.  
6*'ꢀ&+5%ꢀ9+..ꢀ$'ꢀ70(+0#.+<'  
+6ꢀ6#-'5ꢀ#$176ꢀ:::ꢀ/+076'5  
;17ꢀ%#0016ꢀ5612ꢀ6*'ꢀ241%'55ꢀ10%'ꢀ+6ꢀ56#46'&  
&1ꢀ;17ꢀ9#06ꢀ61ꢀ70(+0#.+<'!  
;'5  
01  
%10(+4/  
• Unfinalizing starts.  
6*'ꢀ&+5%ꢀ*#5ꢀ$''0ꢀ(+0#.+<'&  
• After unfinalizing is complete, a “THE DISC HAS BEEN  
1-  
UNFINALIZED” message appears on the monitor.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing/Importing  
4 Select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
• The disc tray will open automatically.  
Copying the Entire Disc  
Copying the entire disc allows all content on a BD (BDMV) or  
DVD (AVCHD, DVD-Video) to be copied onto another disc.  
5 Set the source BD or DVD on the disc tray  
6 Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
Note:  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
• Content cannot be copied to a formatted BD-R or DVD-R  
disc. Make use of an unformatted disc.  
• Use a DVD-R/-RW instead of a BD-R/-RE or DVD when the  
5'.'%6ꢀꢁ56#46ꢁꢀ61ꢀ$')+0ꢀ&7$$+0)  
&+5%ꢀ%12;  
source disc is a BD disc.  
• The disc to be copied onto will be formatted when copy is  
performed. Check that the disc has not been used before or  
if it is ok to delete data on the disc when using a BD-RE or  
a DVD-RW.  
+05'46ꢀ6*'ꢀ&+5%ꢀ61ꢀ$'ꢀ%12+'&  
• In the case of BD, volume labels are not copied.  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
56#46  
• If an unsupported disc is set, “UNABLE TO IMPORT  
FROM DISC” or “UNABLE TO DUB ONTO DISC INSERT  
ANOTHER DISC” will be displayed on the monitor. Use a  
disc that is supported by this unit.  
For details on discs that are supported by this unit, refer to  
"Discs that enable both dubbing and playback" (A page 10)  
and "Discs that enable playback only" (A page 10) .  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
• The disc tray will close automatically. The source BD or  
DVD will be recognized, and copying to the internal HDD  
will proceed.  
• The disc tray will open automatically after copying has  
finished and “READY TO COPY NOW. INSERT THE DISC  
FOR COPYING” will be displayed on the monitor.  
1 Press the [DUBBING] button on the remote  
control unit  
• The Dubbing screen appears.  
Memo:  
• Confirm the insufficient space on the internal HDD when the  
copy interrupts.  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
7 Set a BD or DVD to copy on the disc tray  
5'.'%6ꢁ+/2146ꢀ&7$$+0)  
8 Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
61ꢁ*&&  
75$  
61ꢁ&8&  
&+5%  
8+&'1  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
*&&  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
5&  
&+5%ꢀ5&  
2+%674'  
&+5%  
*&8ꢀ&8  
5'.'%6ꢀꢁ56#46ꢁꢀ61ꢀ$')+0ꢀ&7$$+0)  
&+5%ꢀ%12;  
&+5%ꢁ%12;  
&+5%  
&+5%  
%#0%'.  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
1-  
':+6  
4'#&;ꢀ61ꢀ%12;ꢀ019ꢂꢀ+05'46ꢀ6*'ꢀ&+5%ꢀ(14ꢀ%12;+0)  
&7$$+0)  
126+10  
4'6740  
2 Select “DISC DISC”, and press the [OK] button  
• A menu screen for copying the entire disc appears.  
h
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
56#46  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
Memo:  
• During copy of the entire disc, data is temporarily copied to  
• The disc tray will close automatically. BD or DVD will be  
recognized, and the contents that were copied to the HDD  
will be copied to the disc.  
the internal HDD.  
• Only discs that are not copyright-protected can be copied.  
3 Set the number of discs to copy using the [  
buttons  
• You can specify up to a maximum of 10 discs.  
/
]
J K  
Memo:  
• The copy operation will not be performed when the  
remaining disc memory is not sufficient.  
&7$$+0)  
52'%+(;ꢀ6*'ꢀ07/$'4ꢀ1(ꢀ%12+'5ꢀ#0&ꢀ5'.'%6ꢀ̌':'%76'̍  
07/$'4ꢀ1(ꢀ%12+'5  
2
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
0':6  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing/Importing  
9 Complete the entire disc copying  
• After copy is complete the tray will open automatically, and  
copy of the entire disc ends.  
Recording Using External  
Inputs  
Videos on an external device that is connected to i.LINK (HDV/  
DV) or video / S-video input can be recorded to the HDD.  
BD, DVD can be recorded from the [VIDEO]/[S-VIDEO] input.  
Memo:  
%10(+4/  
• Only titles that are not copyright-protected can be imported.  
%12;+0)ꢀ1061ꢀ6*'ꢀ:::ꢀ&+5%ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&  
1 Press the [HDD] or [BD/SD] button to select the  
1-  
location to record the file  
2 Press the [INPUT SELECT] button on the remote  
control, and choose external input (HDV/DV or L-1)  
3 Press the [REC MODE] button and select a  
recording mode  
Memo:  
4 Press the [ ] and [ ] remote control buttons  
R
I
• The screen prompting you to insert a new disc appears  
repeatedly until this unit has finished copying the number of  
discs specified in Step 3. When the message appears, set a  
new BD or DVD on the disc tray, select “START”, and press  
the [OK] button.  
together to start the recording process  
• Recording can also be start by pressing the [ ] button on  
this unit.  
R
5 Operate the external device using i.LINK(HDV/DV)  
or the video/S-video input to output the videos to  
be recorded  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
5'.'%6ꢀꢁ56#46ꢁꢀ61ꢀ$')+0ꢀ&7$$+0)  
&+5%ꢀ%12;  
6 Press the [ ] button on either this unit or the  
o
remote control to display the pop-up screen,  
choose “STOP” and press the [OK] button  
• End the recording.  
%12;+0)ꢀ1061ꢀ6*'ꢀꢂ56ꢀ&+5%ꢀ+5ꢀ%1/2.'6'&  
+05'46ꢀ#ꢀ0'9ꢀ&+5%  
Memo:  
• Recording will continue even if the external device is  
stopped.  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
56#46  
• Recording will be stopped if the maximum recording time  
has been reached, or if there is insufficient memory in the  
media.  
• For HDV contents, “DR” will be used to record instead of  
the selected recording mode.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
• After copy is complete, the data copied onto the HDD will  
be deleted.  
• Select “CANCEL” from the menu, and press the [OK] button  
to cancel disc copying.  
• RECORDABLE MEDIA  
RECORDING  
MODE  
RECORDABLE MEDIA  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
BD-RE  
(BD-AV format)  
&7$$+0)  
56'2  
(VR format)  
5'.'%6ꢀꢁ56#46ꢁꢀ61ꢀ$')+0ꢀ&7$$+0)  
DR  
HDV  
-
-
-
-
&+5%ꢀ%12;  
%10(+4/  
AF (HD)  
AN (HD)  
AL (HD)  
AE (HD)  
XP (SD)  
SP (SD)  
LP (SD)  
EP (SD)  
-
-
-
-
&1ꢀ;17ꢀ9#06ꢀ61ꢀ%#0%'.ꢀ&7$$+0)!  
-
-
-
;'5  
01  
-
-
-
DV/L1  
DV/L1  
DV/L1  
DV/L1  
L1  
L1  
L1  
L1  
L1  
L1  
L1  
L1  
%#0%'.  
$#%-  
56#46  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
&7$$+0)  
4'6740  
• MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS RECORDING TIME  
HDD : 24 hours (*1)  
DVD-RW : 8 hours  
BD-RE : 8 hours  
*1: Title will automatically be split into time separated by 8  
hours. The dividing point will not be recorded.  
For the recording modes and maximum recording time for  
each disc, refer to "Recording Modes" (A page 28) .  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing Back  
About Playing Back  
Videos or edited videos stored on the internal HDD, as well as  
videos stored on a disc or SD card can be played back on this  
unit.  
Using Playback Navigation  
Videos can be easily played back for viewing using the  
"Playback Navigation" function available on this unit.  
The types of media that are playable on this unit are as  
follows.  
• Videos and still images stored on the internal HDD  
• Videos stored on different disc types  
• Videos and still images stored on SD cards  
These videos can be easily played back for viewing using the  
"Playback Navigation" software that comes with this unit.  
Displaying the Playback Navigation screen  
1 Select the location of the playback file  
• Press the [HDD] button on the remote control unit  
Play back videos or still images stored on the HDD.  
• Press the [BD/SD] button on the remote control unit.  
Play back videos or still images stored on a BD/DVD or a  
SD.  
For details on the "Playback Navigation" software, refer to  
2 Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote  
control unit  
• The Playback Navigation screen appears.  
"Using Playback Navigation" (A page 48) .  
Memo:  
• This unit does not support DivX videos.  
• If AVCHD files are displayed in thumbnails, black bars may  
appear on the left and right borders depending on the video  
resolution.  
Memo:  
• Pressing the [BD/SD] button each time switches the media  
to play back between BD/DVD and SD.  
• You can also switch the media to play back by pressing the  
[HDD] or [BD/SD] button when the Playback Navigation  
screen is displayed.  
Display Marks on the Playback Navigation  
Screen  
Icon  
Mark name  
Explanation  
Operating Playback Navigation  
Protect Mark Indicates protected titles.  
o
Playing a video/still image  
Plays the selected video/still image.  
Mode  
Conversion  
Preset Mark  
Indicates titles for which mode  
conversion has been preset.  
6+6.' ꢃ6*7/$0#+.ꢄ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
4'/#+0 ꢀꢁꢂ  
2+%674'  
2CIG  
Not Viewed  
Mark  
Indicates titles that have  
not been viewed or groups  
containing titles that have not  
been viewed.  
)4172  
001  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
VKVNG  
00  
Scene Delete Indicates titles for which scene  
Mark  
delete or chapter delete has  
been applied.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢅ2)  
0':6ꢅ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
Group Mark  
Indicates a group.  
4'6740  
• Select a title to play back, followed by pressing the [OK] or  
[ ] button to play the selected video/still image.  
Playlist Mark Indicates a playlist.  
I
Memo:  
Not Playable Indicates titles that cannot be  
• Select a group and press the [OK] button to display all titles  
Mark  
played.  
in the group.  
Question  
Mark  
Indicates titles of which the  
thumbnails cannot be displayed.  
Playback may not be possible.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing Back  
o
o
Switching between thumbnail and list  
displays  
Switching between video and still image  
displays  
You can switch between the thumbnail display and list display  
of a video.  
You can switch the display between the video thumbnail list  
screen and still image thumbnail screen.  
• When the video thumbnail list screen is displayed  
• When the video thumbnail list screen is displayed  
6+6.' ꢃ6*7/$0#+.ꢄ  
6+6.' ꢃ6*7/$0#+.ꢄ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
4'/#+0 ꢀꢁꢂ  
4'/#+0 ꢀꢁꢂ  
2+%674'  
2+%674'  
2CIG  
2CIG  
)4172  
)4172  
001  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
001  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
VKVNG  
VKVNG  
00  
00  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
1-  
24'8ꢅ2)  
0':6ꢅ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
24'8ꢅ2)  
0':6ꢅ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
4'6740  
Press the [RED] button to display the title list screen.  
• When the title list screen is displayed  
Press the [GREEN] button to display the still image  
thumbnail list screen.  
• When the still image thumbnail list screen is displayed  
0#8+)#6+10 6+6.' ꢄ.+56ꢅ  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
6+6.'ꢂ6*7/$0#+.ꢃ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
2CIG  
4'/#+0 ꢀꢁꢀ  
2+%674'  
)4172  
#..  
2CIG  
(1.&'4  
#$%  
5RQTVUꢀꢀ  
%QQMKPIꢁꢁꢁ  
-+&5ꢂ914.&  
0GYUꢂ###  
4GRQTV  
(.19'4ꢂ.'5510ꢂꢃ  
#PKOCN  
5'.'%6  
1-  
4'6740  
)4172  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
6*7/$0#+. 2+%674'  
0#8+)#6+10  
126+10  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢄ2)  
0':6ꢄ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
%106'06  
(1.&'4  
4'6740  
Press the [RED] button to display the video thumbnail list  
screen.  
Press the [RED] button to display the video thumbnail list  
screen.  
o
Displaying a group/folder  
A group/folder screen can be displayed.  
o
Displaying the Option menu  
Displaying the Option menu enables you to perform different  
operations on a selected title/group, including “BACK”, “PLAY”,  
“DELETE”, “DUB”, “GROUP”, “UNGROUP”, “DO  
NOT GROUP”, “MODE CHANGE”, “EDIT”, “EDIT INFO” and  
“OTHERS”.  
6+6.'ꢂ.+56ꢃ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
)4172  
4'/#+0 ꢀꢁꢀ  
#..  
2CIG  
9GFFKPI  
&TKXKPI  
$KTVJFC[ꢄ%QOOKVVGG  
6TCXGN  
2KEPKE  
001  
00  
1 Select a title/group, and press the [OPTION]  
button  
• An Option menu appears.  
5RQTVUꢄFC[  
2KCPQꢄEQPEGTV  
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
126+105  
2+%674'  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
$#%-  
1-  
24'8ꢄ2)  
0':6ꢄ2)  
':+6  
.+56  
2+%674'  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'6740  
2.#;  
)4172  
#..  
&'.'6'  
&7$  
001  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
Press the [YELLOW] button to display the group/folder  
screen.  
&1ꢂ016ꢂ)4172  
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'  
'&+6  
VKVNG  
'&+6ꢂ+0(1  
16*'45  
00  
00  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing Back  
• EDIT INFO  
Switches to the menu screen of the sub-items.  
• MODIFY TITLE NAME/MODIFY GROUP NAME  
Using Playback Navigation  
(Continued)  
Switches to the rename screen for the selected title/group  
name.  
For details, refer to "Changing the Title/Group Name"  
(A page 62) .  
2 Select an operation option, and press the [OK]  
button  
• Options that cannot be operated are displayed in gray and  
cannot be selected.  
• MODIFY THUMBNAIL  
Switches to the thumbnail modification screen of the  
selected title.  
For details, refer to "Editing a Thumbnail" (A page 66) .  
For details on the Option menu items, refer to "Option menu  
list" (A page 50) .  
• MODIFY DATE  
Switches to the recording date modification screen of the  
selected title.  
Option menu list  
• BACK  
Returns to the previous screen.  
• PLAY  
For details, refer to "Changing the Shooting Date/Time"  
(A page 72) .  
Plays back the selected title/group.  
• PROTECT  
For details on the button operations during playback, refer  
to "Video Playback Operation" (A page 51) .  
Switches to the protection screen of the selected title/  
group.  
• DELETE  
For details, refer to "Turning On Title/Group Protection"  
(A page 63) .  
Deletes a selected title/group.  
For details, refer to "Deleting a Title/Group" (A page 62) .  
• UNPROTECT  
• DUB  
Switches to the screen for turning off protection of the  
selected title/group.  
Performs dubbing of a selected title/group.  
For details, refer to "Turning Off Title/Group Protection"  
(A page 64) .  
• OTHERS  
For details, refer to "Dubbing/Importing" (A page 23) .  
• GROUP  
Groups the selected titles/groups.  
For details, refer to "Grouping" (A page 60) .  
Switches to the menu screen of the other-items.  
• CHAPTER LIST  
• DETAILS  
• UNGROUP  
Ungroups a selected group.  
For details, refer to "Ungrouping" (A page 60) .  
• DO NOT GROUP  
• THUMBNAIL  
• LIST  
Removes the selected titles from a group.  
• VIDEO  
For details, refer to "Excluding from a group" (A page 61) .  
• MODE CHANGE  
• PICTURE  
• GROUP  
Changes the mode of the selected title/group.  
For details, refer to "Mode conversion" (A page 73) .  
• CHAPTER LIST  
• FOLDER SELECT  
• CONTENT  
Displays the chapters of a selected title.  
• EDIT  
Switches to the menu screen of the sub-items.  
• CHAPTER EDIT  
Switches to the chapter edit screen of the selected title.  
For details, refer to "Editing a Chapter" (A page 67) .  
• PLAYLIST EDIT  
Switches to the playlist edit screen of the selected title.  
For details, refer to "Creating a Playlist" (A page 65) .  
• DELETE SCENE  
Switches to the delete scene screen of the selected title.  
For details, refer to "Delete Scenes" (A page 70) .  
• DIVIDE  
Switches to the dividing screen of the selected title.  
For details, refer to "Dividing" (A page 69) .  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing Back  
Frequently used button operations  
Video Playback Operation  
o
[
] button  
I
• If the stop position (resume point) is memorized in the  
selected video, pressing the button plays back the video  
from this position.  
The video may not resume playback depending on the  
media and settings used. Refer to “RESUME” (A page 77)  
• If playback is paused (Still mode), pressing the button  
resumes playback.  
o
[
] button  
o
• Pressing the button stops playback after memorizing the  
stop position (resume point).  
• Pressing the button again after playback stops clears the  
memory of the stop position (resume point).  
o
[
] button  
W
• Pressing the button stops playback temporarily.  
o
[
] button  
N
• Pressing the button once during playback switches to a  
playback speed of 1.3 times (with audio sound).  
• Pressing the button in the 1.3x playback or fast forward  
mode fast forwards the video.  
Pressing the button each time switches the search speed.  
(5xh10xh30xh60x)  
Memo:  
• The listed speed for searching and slow motion is an  
approximate amount.  
• Pressing the button in the Still mode forwards the video  
frame by frame.  
• Pressing and holding down the button in the Still mode  
starts playback in slow motion.  
Pressing the button during playback in slow motion switches  
the playback speed. The speed changes each time the  
button is pressed.  
(1/24xh1/16xh1/8xh1/2x)  
o
[
] button  
O
• During normal playback, 1.3x playback, fast forward, or fast  
reverse, pressing the button fast reverses playback.  
Pressing the button each time switches the search speed.  
(1xh5xh10xh30x)  
• Pressing the button in the Still mode reverses the video  
frame by frame.  
• Pressing and holding down the button in the Still mode  
starts reverse playback of the video in slow motion.  
Pressing the button during playback in slow motion switches  
the playback speed. The speed changes each time the  
button is pressed. (1/24xh1/16xh1/8xh1/2x)  
Memo:  
• The listed speed for searching and slow motion is an  
approximate amount.  
o
[
] / [  
] button  
T
S
• Pressing any of the buttons moves the chapter position.  
o
[MARK] button  
• Pressing the button enables you to add a chapter mark to a  
title.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing Back  
Useful button operations  
Video Playback Operation  
(Continued)  
o
[PB MODE] button  
• Displays the Playback Settings screen, which enables you  
to modify the settings.  
For details, refer to "Changing Playback Settings".  
o
[
] button  
v
• During normal playback, 1.3x playback, slow motion  
playback, fast forward, or fast reverse, pressing the button  
moves the playback position forward by about 30 seconds.  
Pressing the button multiple times moves playback to  
the position equivalent to the number of times pressed  
multiplied by 30 seconds.  
• Normal playback will resume after the position has been  
moved. If pressed during 1.3x playback, 1.3x playback will  
continue after the position has been moved.  
o
[AUDIO] button  
• Switches the audio channel.  
o
[SUB TITLE] button  
• Switches the subtitle display.  
o
[ANGLE] button  
• Switches the angle.  
Contents may be played back in the normal mode  
depending on the type of disc or content.  
Memo:  
• Pressing the [AUDIO], [SUB TITLE], or [ANGLE] button has  
no effect if their selection is not available in the playback  
video.  
• Pressing the button in the Still mode moves the current  
paused position forward by about 30 seconds while  
maintaining the Still mode.  
o
[
] button  
w
• During normal playback, 1.3x playback, slow motion  
playback, fast forward, or fast reverse, pressing the button  
moves the playback position back by about seven seconds.  
Pressing the button multiple times moves playback to  
the position equivalent to the number of times pressed  
multiplied by seven seconds.  
• Normal playback will resume after the position has been  
moved. If pressed during 1.3x playback, 1.3x playback will  
continue after the position has been moved.  
Contents may be played back in the normal mode  
depending on the type of disc or content.  
• Pressing the button in the Still mode moves the current  
paused position back by about seven seconds while  
maintaining the Still mode.  
o
[HDD] button  
• During playback of videos on a “BD/DVD” or “SD”, pressing  
the button stops the current playback and switches to the  
“HDD” mode.  
Pressing the button during display of the Playback  
Navigation screen switches to the Playback Navigation  
screen for the “HDD” mode.  
o
[BD/SD] button  
• During playback of videos on a “BD/DVD” or “SD”, pressing  
the button stops the current playback and switches from  
“BD/DVD” to “SD” or vice versa.  
Pressing the button during display of the Playback  
Navigation screen switches to the Playback Navigation  
screen for the other media. During playback of videos on  
the “HDD”, pressing the button stops the current playback  
and switches to “BD/DVD” mode.  
Memo:  
• The display switches automatically to the SD mode only  
if the inserted SD card contains playable videos or still  
images.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing Back  
Playing Video Discs Created Using a PC  
Videos that are created using a PC can be played back using  
Playback Navigation.  
Playing Videos on a BD/  
DVD  
Playback starts automatically after a BD/DVD is set.  
If the Auto Play feature is disabled, play the title using  
Playback Navigation.  
1 Set the disc on the disc tray  
2 Press the [NAVIGATION] button  
• The Playback Navigation screen appears.  
Memo:  
3 Select a title, and press the [OK] button  
• Playback of the selected title starts.  
• For details on the button operations during playback, refer  
to "Video Playback Operation" (A page 51) .  
Memo:  
• The formats that can be played back are BDAV, BDMV,  
DVD-Video and DVD-VR (CPRM-compatible).  
Playing a disc when Auto Play is enabled  
• If the current playback location is HDD or SD CARD, press  
the [BD/SD] button on the remote control unit to switch it to  
BD/DVD.  
1 Set a BD or DVD on the disc tray  
• Auto Play starts.  
• Videos can also be played back without starting up  
Playback Navigation.  
Playing a disc when Auto Play is disabled  
1 Set a BD or DVD on the disc tray  
Pressing the [ ] button starts playback from the stop  
I
position (resume point) of the disc.  
2 Press the [NAVIGATION] button  
• The Playback Navigation screen appears.  
If the stop position (resume point) is not memorized or if the  
setting for resume has been set to off, playback starts from  
the beginning of the disc.  
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
• Playback may not be possible due to compatibility  
2+%674'  
problems.  
001  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
'06'4  
$#%-  
8+&'1 2+%674'  
)4172  
3 Select a title, and press the [OK] button  
• Playback of the selected title starts.  
Memo:  
• If the current playback location is HDD or SD, press the  
[BD/SD] button on the remote control unit to switch it to BD/  
DVD.  
• Videos can also be played back without starting up  
Playback Navigation.  
Pressing the [ ] button starts playback from the stop  
I
position (resume point) of the disc.  
If the stop position (resume point) is not memorized or if the  
setting for resume has been set to off, playback starts from  
the beginning of the disc.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing Back  
Playing Videos on the HDD  
Playing Videos on a SD  
Card  
Titles stored on the HDD can be played back using Playback  
Navigation.  
Titles stored on an SD card can be played back using  
Playback Navigation.  
You can select a video to play from "Title", "Group", or  
"Playlist".  
You can select a video to play from "Title".  
Memo:  
1 Insert the SD card into the [SD SLOT]  
• Switch the playback location to “SD CARD” after the SD  
card is detected by the unit.  
• For details on the button operations during playback, refer  
to "Video Playback Operation" (A page 51) .  
2 Press the [NAVIGATION] button  
• The Playback Navigation screen appears.  
Playing titles stored on the HDD  
1 Press the [NAVIGATION] button  
• The Playback Navigation screen appears.  
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
2 Select the titles to playback, and press the [ ]  
I
001  
button  
• Playback of the selected title starts.  
Memo:  
• If the current playback location is “BD/DVD” or “SD CARD”,  
press the [HDD] button on the remote control unit to switch  
it to “HDD”.  
• To play back specific titles within a group, select the group,  
press the [OK] button, and select the titles accordingly.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
'06'4  
$#%-  
8+&'1 2+%674'  
)4172  
• Videos can also be played back without starting up  
Playback Navigation.  
3 Select a title, and press the [OK] button  
• Playback of the selected title starts.  
Pressing the [ ] button starts playback of the most recently  
I
played title.  
Memo:  
If there are no recently played titles, playback starts from  
the title with the most recent recording date.  
• Playback navigation displays AVCHD files stored on the SD  
card in titles, not in scenes (chapters). Titles are grouped  
such as according to the date, recording mode, or number  
of scenes. Make use of thumbnail display to display titles.  
List display is not supported.  
• The formats that can be played back are AVCHD and SD-  
VIDEO. If AVCHD files are displayed in thumbnails, black  
bars may appear on the left and right borders depending on  
the video resolution.  
• When there are files of different formats (AVCHD, SD-  
VIDEO) in the SD card, press the [RED] button to select the  
format you want to display.  
• Videos can also be played back without starting up  
Playback Navigation.  
Pressing the [ ] button starts playback from the stop  
I
position (resume point).  
If the stop position (resume point) is not memorized,  
playback starts from the beginning of the playable content.  
If the setting for “QUICK STARTUP” is set to “OFF”, the  
resume point will not be memorized when the power is  
turned OFF.  
For details on the button operations during playback, refer to  
"Video Playback Operation" (A page 51) .  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing Back  
Enabled button operations during still  
Playing Still Images (JPEG)  
Still images stored on the HDD/BD/DVD/SD card can be  
played back using Playback Navigation.  
image playback  
o
[
] button  
I
• Pressing the button when a title/group is selected starts  
playback of the still images in the title/group in a slideshow.  
Playing still images  
o
[
] button  
1 Select the playback location  
o
HDD  
: If the current playback location is “BD/DVD” or “SD  
CARD”, press the [HDD] button on the remote  
control unit to switch it to “HDD”.  
• Pressing the button stops the slideshow and displays the  
Playback Navigation screen.  
o
[
] button  
W
BD/DVD : If the current playback location is “HDD” or “SD  
CARD”, press the [BD/SD] button on the remote  
control unit to switch it to “BD/DVD”.  
SD card : If the current playback location is “HDD” or “BD/  
DVD”, press the [BD/SD] button on the remote  
control unit to switch it to “SD CARD”.  
• Pressing the button stops the slideshow temporarily.  
o
[
] / [  
] button  
S
T
• Pressing the button displays the previous or next still image.  
o
[
] button  
A
2 Set the media  
• To play a media other than “HDD”, set the media on which  
the still images are stored.  
• Pressing the button ends playback of the still images and  
turns the operation of the unit to "Off".  
Memo:  
BD/DVD : Set a BD or DVD on the disc tray  
• The display of still images can be zoomed in/out or rotated  
using the following buttons when the slideshow is paused.  
SD card : Insert the SD card into the [SD SLOT]  
3 Select the still images to play, and press the [  
button  
• Images selected are played back in a slideshow.  
]
I
• [  
] / [BLUE] button  
v
Rotates the still image by 90° in the anti-clockwise  
direction.  
• [  
] / [YELLOW] button  
w
6+6.'ꢂ6*7/$0#+.ꢃ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
4'/#+0 ꢀꢁꢀ  
Rotates the still image by 90° in the clockwise direction.  
• [OK] / [RED] button  
2+%674'  
2CIG  
(1.&'4  
Enlarges the still image.  
• [RETURN] / [GREEN] button  
Reduces the still image.  
• [  
/
/
/
] button  
J
K
H
I
Moves the display position toward the direction indicated  
by the button.  
• This unit does not have a still image edit feature. Still  
images cannot be saved when they are zoomed in or  
rotated.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢄ2)  
0':6ꢄ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
%106'06  
(1.&'4  
4'6740  
• Priority of display is given to the media (“BD/DVD” or “SD  
CARD”) that contains playable still images.  
If both “BD/DVD” and “SD CARD” contain playable videos,  
priority of display will be given to the most recently used  
media.  
Memo:  
• The slide show plays back images according to the date of  
the files.  
• If folders exist, files inside the selected folder will be played.  
• You can specify the “REPEAT”, “SLIDESHOW INTERVAL”  
and “SLIDESHOW EFFECTS” settings in the Playback  
Settings menu.  
For details, refer to the “REPEAT” (A page 56) ,  
“SLIDESHOW INTERVAL” (A page 56) , and  
“SLIDESHOW EFFECTS” (A page 56) items under  
“Playback Settings”.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing Back  
Playback settings  
Changing Playback  
Settings  
2.#;$#%-ꢀ5'66+0)  
4'2'#6  
1((  
%*#0)'ꢀ6+6.'  
%*#0)'ꢀ%*#26'4  
6+/'ꢀ,7/2  
Displaying the playback settings menu  
1 Press the [PB MODE] button on the remote  
control unit during the playback of a title  
• The Settings Menu screen appears.  
• The playback settings menu can only be displayed during  
the playback of a title.  
• Only settings that are supported by the current title being  
played back can be changed in the playback settings  
o
REPEAT  
menu.  
Items displayed in gray cannot be set.  
The following items can be set.  
Items are not displayed if they cannot be set.  
Setting Values  
OFF  
Description  
Turns off repeat.  
Playback Settings Menu  
Audio/subtitle settings  
#7&+1ꢁ57$6+6.'  
TITLE  
Repeats playback of the currently played  
title.  
CHAPTER  
TRACK  
Repeats playback of the currently played  
chapter.  
#7&+1ꢂ.#0)7#)'  
ꢀ
.ꢁ4  
ꢃ
Repeats playback of the currently played  
track.  
%*#0)'ꢂ#7&+1ꢂ176276  
57$6+6.'ꢂ.#0)7#)'  
FOLDER  
Repeats playback within the currently  
played folder.  
ALL  
A-B  
Repeats playback of the entire disc.  
Repeats playback of the section between  
the specified starting and ending points.  
Pressing the [OK] button specifies the  
displayed scene as the starting point  
(Point A). Pressing the [OK] button after  
forwarding playback specifies the displayed  
scene as the ending point (Point B).  
Memo:  
• “AUDIO/SUBTITLE” will be displayed only if they are  
available in the video content. The setting value differs  
depending on the content. Items that are not available in  
the content cannot be set.  
o
CHANGE TITLE  
You can change to a different title by entering the  
corresponding numeric value. Any value that is larger than the  
number of titles cannot be entered.  
o
AUDIO LANGUAGE  
o
CHANGE CHAPTER  
o
CHANGE AUDIO OUTPUT  
You can change to a different chapter by entering the  
corresponding numeric value. Any value that is larger than the  
number of chapters cannot be entered.  
o
SIGNAL TYPE (BD-ROM)  
• PRIMARY VIDEO  
• PRIMARY AUDIO  
o
TIME JUMP  
You can move to a specific playback position by entering a time.  
This is not possible if the specified time is not valid.  
• SECONDARY VIDEO  
• CHANGE SECONDARY VIDEO  
• SECONDARY AUDIO  
o
SLIDESHOW INTERVAL  
• SECONDARY AUDIO LANGUAGE  
The following items can be set.  
3SEC/5SEC/10SEC/20SEC/30SEC modes  
o
SUBTITLE LANGUAGE  
o
SLIDESHOW EFFECTS  
o
SUBTITLE STYLE  
The following items can be set.  
o
CHANGE ANGLE  
Setting Values  
Description  
OFF  
ON  
Turns off slideshow effect.  
Turns on slideshow effect. "Fade out"  
and "Fade in" effects can be applied  
when switching from one slide to another.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing Back  
o
PROGRESSIVE OUTPUT  
Video settings  
The following items can be set.  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
8+&'1ꢀ5'66+0)  
2+%674'ꢀ37#.+6;  
014/#.  
1((  
&+)+6#.ꢀ01+5'ꢀ4'&7%6+10  
241)4'55+8'ꢀ176276  
AUTO1  
Displays video images after they are  
#761ꢁ  
converted according to the film material.  
AUTO2  
In addition to the “AUTO1” option, support is  
also provided for progressive videos recorded  
at 30 frames per second.  
VIDEO  
Most suitable for video images (TV broadcast,  
etc.). Select this option when playing videos  
with significant movements or animated  
videos.  
o
PICTURE QUALITY  
The following items can be set.  
Setting Values  
Description  
NORMAL  
CINEMA  
FINE  
Standard picture quality.  
Effective when playing movies.  
Produces sharp images with enhanced  
outlines.  
SOFT  
Reduces noise that is prominent in the  
video image.  
USER  
SETTING  
Enables the Details setting. For more  
details, refer to “DETAIL SETTING”.  
o
DETAIL SETTING  
The following items can be set.  
Choose an option and press [OK] to set the respective values.  
Setting Values  
CONTRAST  
BRIGHTNESS  
SHARPNESS  
COLOR  
Description  
A value between "-7" and "+7" can be set.  
A value between "0" and "15" can be set.  
A value between "-6" and "+6" can be set.  
A value between "-7" and "+7" can be set.  
A value between "0" and "5" can be set.  
GAMMA  
o
DIGITAL NOISE REDUCTION  
The following items can be set.  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
OFF  
ON  
Turns off DNR (Digital Noise Reduction).  
Reduces noise that is prominent in images  
of lengthy videos.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing  
Before editing  
This unit mainly edits video images stored on the HDD. To edit video images stored in a disc or SD card, do so after importing  
them to the HDD.  
Data on a finalized disc cannot be edited. To edit a finalized disc, you have to either unfinalize the disc, or do so after importing  
the data to the HDD.  
Memo:  
• Only discs that are finalized using this unit can be unfinalized.  
Editable items for different media  
Items that are editable vary according to the type of media on which the video data is stored. For details, refer to the media chart  
below.  
o
Media chart  
Editing option  
HDD  
BD-R  
(BDAV)  
BD-RE  
(BDAV)  
DVD-RW/  
DVD-R  
SD  
HDD/BD-  
RE/SD  
(picture)  
Grouping  
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
Changing the Title/Group Name  
Deleting a Title/Group  
Turning On Title/Group Protection  
Turning Off Title/Group Protection  
Creating a Playlist  
X
X
X
-
*1  
*1  
-
-
Editing a Thumbnail  
-
X
*2  
-
X
*2  
-
X
Editing a Chapter  
*1,*2  
-
-
Delete Scene  
-
Dividing  
-
-
-
-
Changing the Disc Name  
Changing the Shooting Date/Time  
-
X
-
X
-
X
-
-
X
Memo:  
*1 : Supports only the “VR MODE”.  
*2 : Supports only dividing and combining of chapters.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Entering characters  
1 Enter characters using the [0]-[9], [ ] or [#]  
Entering Characters  
Z
Names can be changed or given to stored videos or groups.  
buttons  
You can enter characters while referring to the input on the  
monitor.  
2 After character input is complete, press the  
[YELLOW] button  
Memo:  
Character input screen  
• Switch between alphanumeric and symbol input by pressing  
the [  
] button.  
w
• For details on the correspondence between each button  
4'0#/'ꢎ6+6.'  
and the input characters, refer to the "Character List".  
• Press the [  
] button to delete an input character.  
v
4'0#/'ꢎ6*'ꢎ5'.'%6'&ꢎ6+6.'  
Press and hold down the [  
characters.  
• Pressing the [RETURN] button calls up the confirmation  
] button to delete all input  
v
ꢀꢁ!ꢂꢃ  
IJKꢅ  
CDEꢄ  
LMNꢆ  
FGHꢍ  
OPQꢇ  
24'8ꢀꢎ%*#4#%6'4  
2#)'ꢎ248  
screen to cancel character input.  
0':6ꢎ%*#4#%6'4  
2#)'ꢎ0':6  
To cancel character input and return to the initial screen,  
select “YES” and press the [OK] button.  
To return to the character input screen, select “NO” and  
press the [OK] button.  
• Up to about 20 alphanumeric characters can be displayed  
on the disc menu of BDMV and DVD-VIDEO. (The  
number of characters that can be displayed varies with the  
character.)  
RSTUꢈ  
VWXꢉ  
ꢊ
YZ[\ꢌ  
ꢋ
%*#4#%6'4ꢎ6;2'  
%.'#4  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
4'6740  
':+6  
%10(+4/  
+0(1ꢀ%144'%6  
Function name field  
Screen description  
Input window  
A
B
C
Note:  
• If you switch the screen display before confirming the input  
characters, a message will appear on the screen.  
Characters entered appear on the input window.  
To cancel character input and proceed to switch the screen  
display, select “YES” and press the [OK] button.  
To return to the character input screen, select “NO” and  
press the [OK] button.  
• If the converted characters exceed the maximum number of  
input characters, a message will appear on the screen.  
Operation guide 1  
The [0]-[9], [Z], [#], [PAGE PRV ], [  
displayed.  
D
] and [  
] buttons are  
v
w
Operation guide 2  
E
[
/
/
/
], [OK], [RETURN], [OPTION], [BLUE], [RED],  
J
K
H
I
[GREEN] and [YELLOW] buttons are displayed.  
Select “OK” and press the [OK] button to delete the excess  
characters and to input the remaining ones.  
Character input keyboard  
F
A character input keyboard appears during input of symbol.  
Select “RETURN” and press the [OK] button to restore the  
You can enter characters by selecting them accordingly from  
the keyboard.  
unconfirmed characters.  
• No more characters can be input if the maximum character  
limit has been reached.  
Character List  
[1]  
[2]  
[3]  
[4]  
[5]  
[6]  
[7]  
[8]  
[9]  
[0]  
[*]  
.
a
d
g
j
,
!
A
D
T
J
1
B
E
G
K
N
P
U
W
_
-
(
ä
è
I
)
æ
é
ì
@
å
ê
í
/
à
ë
î
:
á
ð
ï
_
â
È
Ì
?
c
f
b
C
F
H
L
ã
É
Í
ç
Ê
Î
Æ
Ð
4
Ç
2
Ä
Ë
Ï
Å
3
À
Ô
;
Á
Õ
<
Â
Ñ
=
Ã
6
>
e
.
h
k
n
q
u
x
.
i
£
ö
R
ù
Y
5
ø
S
ú
Z
!
l
m
p
t
M
s
O
Q
V
X
/
ò
ÿ
û
ý
?
ó
ß
ü
þ
~
ô
$
Ù
Ý
(
õ
7
Ú
Þ
)
ñ
Ö
Ü
#
Ø
8
Ò
Ó
^
o
r
T
z
Û
9
*
v
y
@
-
w
0
,
*1  
[
-
:
+
,
$
>
%
&
]
'
`
{
|
}
*1  
.
~
!
?
*1 : Single-byte space  
*2 : Press the [#] button to return to the previous input character.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
5 Select “GROUP”, and press the [OK] button  
• The selected titles and groups are now grouped together.  
Grouping  
Multiple titles stored on the HDD can be combined into a  
group.  
6+6.' ꢃ6*7/$0#+.ꢄ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
4'/#+0 ꢀꢁꢀ  
2CIG  
Memo:  
)4172  
#..  
• Only video data stored on the HDD can be grouped.  
)4172  
6*'ꢂ5'.'%6'&ꢂ6+6.'5ꢂ9+..ꢂ$'ꢂ)4172'&ꢂ61)'6*'4  
;17ꢂ%#0ꢂ/1&+(;ꢂ6*'ꢂ)4172ꢂ0#/'ꢂ(41/  
̌'&+6ꢂ+0(1̍ꢂ70&'4ꢂ6*'ꢂ126+10ꢂ/'07  
Grouping  
)4172  
$#%-  
1 Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote  
control unit  
• The Playback Navigation screen appears.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
1-  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'6740  
2 Select the titles or groups to be grouped, and  
press the [MARK] button  
• Pressing the [MARK] button adds a check mark to the  
selected titles/groups.  
Memo:  
• To cancel grouping, select “BACK” and press the [OK]  
button.  
All titles and groups with the check mark will be grouped  
together.  
• Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
grouping and return to the initial screen.  
6+6.' ꢁ6*7/$0#+.ꢂ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
Ungrouping  
)4172  
#..  
1 Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote  
control unit  
• The Playback Navigation screen appears.  
2 Select the group to ungroup, and press the  
[OPTION] button  
• A pop-up option list appears.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
3 Select “UNGROUP”, and press the [OK] button  
4'6740  
• An ungroup confirmation screen appears.  
3 Press the [OPTION] button on the remote control  
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
unit  
126+105  
2+%674'  
• A pop-up option list appears.  
$#%-  
2.#;  
)4172  
#..  
4 Select “GROUP”, and press the [OK] button  
• A grouping confirmation screen appears.  
&'.'6'  
&7$  
001  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
70)4172  
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'  
'&+6  
6+6.'ꢁ6*7/$0#+.ꢂ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
VKVNG  
126+105  
'&+6ꢂ+0(1  
16*'45  
2+%674'  
00  
00  
$#%-  
2.#;  
)4172  
#..  
&'.'6'  
&7$  
)4172  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
/1&'ꢀ%*#0)'  
'&+6  
4'6740  
'&+6ꢀ+0(1  
16*'45  
Memo:  
• You cannot ungroup multiple groups at the same time.  
When multiple groups are selected, the “UNGROUP” item  
does not appear in the option list.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
4 Select “YES”, and press the [OK] button  
• All titles within the selected group are ungrouped.  
3 Press the [OPTION] button on the remote control  
unit  
• A pop-up option list appears.  
6+6.' ꢂ6*7/$0#+.ꢃ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
4 Select “DO NOT GROUP”, and press the [OK]  
button  
• A confirmation screen for group exclusion appears.  
2+%674'  
4'/#+0 ꢀꢁꢀ  
2CIG  
)4172  
#..  
70)4172  
5 Select “YES”, and press the [OK] button  
• The selected titles are now excluded from the group.  
6*'ꢄ5'.'%6'&ꢄ)4172ꢄ9+..ꢄ$'ꢄ70)4172'&  
70)4172!  
;'5  
01  
6+6.'ꢃ6*7/$0#+.ꢄ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
4'/#+0 ꢀꢁꢀ  
2CIG  
)4172  
#..  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢄ2)  
0':6ꢄ2)  
':+6  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'6740  
&1ꢂ016ꢂ)4172  
6*'ꢂ5'.'%6'&ꢂ6+6.'ꢃ5ꢄꢂ9+..ꢂ$'ꢂ4'/18'&ꢂ(41/ꢂ6*+5ꢂ)4172  
4'/18'ꢂ(41/ꢂ)4172!  
Memo:  
;'5  
01  
• To cancel ungrouping, select “NO” and press the [OK]  
button.  
• Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
ungrouping and return to the initial screen.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'6740  
Excluding from a group  
You can select titles and exclude them from a group.  
Memo:  
• To cancel, select “NO” and press the [OK] button.  
• Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
group exclusion and return to the initial screen.  
1 Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote  
control unit  
• The Playback Navigation screen appears.  
2 Select the titles to exclude from the group, and  
press the [MARK] button  
• Pressing the [MARK] button adds a check mark to the  
selected titles/groups.  
All titles with the check mark will be excluded from the  
group.  
6+6.' ꢁ6*7/$0#+.ꢂ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
)4172  
#..  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Changing the Title/Group  
Name  
Deleting a Title/Group  
Titles/groups can be deleted. When you delete a group, all  
titles contained within the group are deleted.  
The saved title/group name can be changed as follows.  
Memo:  
Memo:  
• When a title/group is deleted from the HDD, BD-RE, or  
DVD-RW, the remaining space on the media increases  
according to the size of the deleted title/group.  
Deleting a title/group from a BD-R or DVD-R does not  
increase the amount of available space on the disc.  
• A title/group name can be added to video data stored on the  
HDD, BD-RE, BD-R, DVD-RW, or DVD-R, and the name  
can be changed.  
• Video data stored on a DVD-RW or DVD-R in the Video  
mode cannot be changed.  
1 Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote  
control unit  
• The Playback Navigation screen appears.  
1 Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote  
control unit  
• The Playback Navigation screen appears.  
2 Select the titles/groups to delete, and press the  
[OPTION] button  
• A pop-up option list appears.  
2 Select the title/group for which the name is to be  
changed, and press the [OPTION] button  
• A pop-up option list appears.  
3 Select “DELETE”, and press the [OK] button  
• A confirmation screen for title/group deletion appears.  
3 Select “EDIT INFO”, and press the [OK] button  
• An information editing screen appears.  
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
126+105  
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ  
2+%674'  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
126+105  
$#%-  
2+%674'  
2.#;  
$#%-  
)4172  
#..  
&'.'6'  
&7$  
2.#;  
)4172  
#..  
&'.'6'  
&7$  
001  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'  
'&+6  
001  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'  
'&+6  
'&+6ꢂ+0(1  
VKVNG  
16*'45  
'&+6ꢂ+0(1  
16*'45  
VKVNG  
00  
00  
00  
00  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
4'6740  
1-  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
4 Select “DELETE”, and press the [OK] button  
• The selected titles/groups are deleted.  
4 Select “MODIFY TITLE NAME” or “MODIFY  
GROUP NAME”, and press the [OK] button  
• A title/group name modifying screen appears.  
6+6.'ꢁ6*7/$0#+.ꢂ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
4'/#+0 ꢃꢄꢃ  
2+%674'  
2CIG  
6+6.' ꢁ6*7/$0#+.ꢂ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
)4172  
#..  
4'/#+0 ꢃꢄꢃ  
2+%674'  
2CIG  
001  
&'.'6'  
)4172  
#..  
+0(14/#6+10ꢀ%144'%6  
/1&+(;ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ0#/'  
&1ꢀ;17ꢀ9#06ꢀ61ꢀ&'.'6'!  
001  
0
00  
00  
VKVNG  
&'.'6'  
$#%-  
00  
/1&+(;ꢀ6*7/$0#+.  
%*#0)'ꢀ5*116+0)ꢀ&#6'ꢅ6+/'  
2416'%6  
VKVNG  
00  
0
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
0#8+)#6+10  
126+10  
4'6740  
5'.'%6  
1-  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
':+6  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
0#8+)#6+10  
126+10  
4'6740  
Memo:  
• To cancel the title/group deletion operation, select “BACK”  
and press the [OK] button.  
• Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
5 Modify the title/group name  
• The modified title/group name is now saved.  
the deletion operation and return to the initial screen.  
Memo:  
• For details on the method of character input, refer to  
"Entering Characters" (A page 59) .  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
4 Select “PROTECT”, and press the [OK] button  
• If only a single title was selected in step 2, a confirmation  
screen for title protection will appear.  
Turning On Title/Group  
Protection  
6+6.' ꢂ6*7/$0#+.ꢃ  
Titles/groups can be protected.  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
4'/#+0 ꢀꢁꢀ  
Editing and deletion cannot be performed on protected titles/  
groups.  
2CIG  
)4172  
#..  
• Title/group protection can be turned on for video data stored  
on the HDD, BD-RE (BDAV), BD-R (BDAV), and DVD-RW  
(VR).  
2416'%6  
6*'ꢄ5'.'%6'&ꢄ6+6.'ꢄ9+..ꢄ$'ꢄ2416'%6'&  
&1ꢄ;17ꢄ9#06ꢄ61ꢄ5'6ꢄ2416'%6+10!  
;'5  
01  
1 Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote  
control unit  
• The Playback Navigation screen appears.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢄ2)  
0':6ꢄ2)  
':+6  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
2 Select the titles/groups to be protected, and  
press the [OPTION] button  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'6740  
• A pop-up option list appears.  
• If multiple titles or groups were selected in step 2,  
“PROTECT” and “UNPROTECT” items will be displayed.  
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
5 Select “YES” or “PROTECT”, and press the [OK]  
button  
• The selected titles/groups are now protected.  
126+105  
2+%674'  
$#%-  
2.#;  
)4172  
#..  
&'.'6'  
&7$  
001  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'  
'&+6  
Memo:  
• All selected titles and groups will be protected when multiple  
'&+6ꢂ+0(1  
16*'45  
VKVNG  
titles or groups are selected.  
00  
00  
• To turn off the title/group protection, select “NO” and press  
the [OK] button.  
• Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to turn off  
the protection and return to the initial screen.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
3 Select “EDIT INFO”, and press the [OK] button  
• An information editing screen appears.  
6+6.' ꢁ6*7/$0#+.ꢂ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
4'/#+0 ꢃꢄꢃ  
2+%674'  
2CIG  
)4172  
#..  
+0(14/#6+10ꢀ%144'%6  
001  
0
00  
00  
/1&+(;ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ0#/'  
/1&+(;ꢀ6*7/$0#+.  
%*#0)'ꢀ5*116+0)ꢀ&#6'ꢅ6+/'  
2416'%6  
VKVNG  
00  
0
5'.'%6  
1-  
':+6  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
0#8+)#6+10  
126+10  
4'6740  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
4 Select “UNPROTECT”, and press the [OK] button  
• If only a single title was selected in step 2, a confirmation  
screen for turning off protection will appear.  
Turning Off Title/Group  
Protection  
Protection of a title/group can be turned off.  
Titles/groups can be edited and deleted after their protection  
is turned off.  
6+6.' ꢃ6*7/$0#+.ꢄ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
(4''ꢂ52#%' ꢀꢁꢀ  
2CIG  
)4172  
#..  
• Title/group protection can be turned off for video data stored  
on the HDD, BD-RE (BDAV), BD-R (BDAV), and DVD-RW  
(VR).  
702416'%6  
::ꢂ6+6.'5ꢂ*#8'ꢂ$''0ꢂ5'.'%6'&ꢂ61ꢂ4'/18'ꢂ6*'ꢂ2416'%6+10  
;'5  
01  
1 Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote  
control unit  
• The Playback Navigation screen appears.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
2 Select the titles/groups to turn off protection for,  
and press the [OPTION] button  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'6740  
• A pop-up option list appears.  
• If multiple titles or groups were selected in step 2,  
“UNPROTECT” and “PROTECT” items will be displayed.  
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
126+105  
5 Select “YES”, and press the [OK] button  
• Protection of the selected titles/groups is now turned off.  
2+%674'  
$#%-  
2.#;  
)4172  
#..  
&'.'6'  
&7$  
Memo:  
001  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'  
'&+6  
• Protection will be turned off from all selected titles and  
groups when multiple titles or groups are selected.  
'&+6ꢂ+0(1  
16*'45  
VKVNG  
• If you do not want to turn off the title/group protection, select  
00  
00  
“NO” and press the [OK] button.  
• Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
protection removal and return to the initial screen.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
3 Select “EDIT INFO”, and press the [OK] button  
• An information editing screen appears.  
6+6.' ꢁ6*7/$0#+.ꢂ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
4'/#+0 ꢃꢄꢃ  
2+%674'  
2CIG  
)4172  
#..  
+0(14/#6+10ꢀ%144'%6  
/1&+(;ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ0#/'  
001  
0
00  
00  
/1&+(;ꢀ6*7/$0#+.  
VKVNG  
%*#0)'ꢀ5*116+0)ꢀ&#6'ꢅ6+/'  
702416'%6  
00  
0
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'6740  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
5 Edit the playlist accordingly by selecting  
Creating a Playlist  
chapters from the source title according to your  
preference  
• Edit the playlist.  
For details, refer to "Editing the playlist".  
2.#;.+56ꢃ'&+6  
A playlist can be created from the video titles on the HDD.  
• Playlists can only be created for titles that are stored on the  
HDD.  
Playlist : Enables you to create a program by selecting  
chapters from a specific title and editing their  
playback sequence.  
5#8'ꢃ2.#;.+56  
'&+6ꢃ2.#;.+56  
5174%'ꢃ6+6.'  
2CIG  
Memo:  
• The playlist created comes in handy during playback and  
ꢀꢀꢁ ꢀꢂꢀꢀꢂꢀꢀ  
dubbing to a disc.  
2CIG  
6#4)'6ꢃ2.#;.+56  
Creating a Playlist  
1 Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote  
control unit  
ꢀꢀꢁ ꢀꢂꢀꢀꢂꢀꢀ  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢃ2)  
0':6ꢃ2)  
':+6  
'&+6  
5#8'  
4'6740  
• The Playback Navigation screen appears.  
6 Press the [YELLOW] button on the remote control  
2 Select the title for which a playlist is to be  
unit  
created, and press the [OPTION] button  
• A playlist is created.  
3 Select “EDIT”, and press the [OK] button  
• The Edit menu screen appears.  
Editing the playlist  
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
126+105  
o
2+%674'  
Chapter insertion  
$#%-  
2.#;  
A Select the chapter to insert from the thumbnails of  
the “SOURCE TITLE”, and press the [OK] button  
B Select the position to insert the chapter from the  
“TARGET PLAYLIST”, and press the [OK] button  
)4172  
#..  
&'.'6'  
&7$  
001  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
&1ꢂ016ꢂ)4172  
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'  
'&+6  
VKVNG  
'&+6ꢂ+0(1  
16*'45  
00  
00  
o
Chapter deletion  
A Select the chapter to delete from the thumbnails of  
the “TARGET PLAYLIST”, and press the [OK] button  
B Select “DELETE”, and press the [OK] button  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
o
Entering the playlist name  
A Select “TARGET PLAYLIST”, and press the [OK]  
button.  
4 Select “PLAYLIST EDIT”, and press the [OK]  
button  
• The playlist edit screen appears.  
B Enter a playlist name, and press the [OK] button  
6+6.' ꢁ6*7/$0#+.ꢂ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
Memo:  
4'/#+0 ꢃꢄꢃ  
2+%674'  
• For details on the method of character input, refer to  
2CIG  
"Entering Characters".  
)4172  
#..  
'&+6  
Note:  
001  
0
0
00  
00  
%*#26'4ꢀ'&+6  
2.#;.+56ꢀ'&+6  
&'.'6'ꢀ5%'0'  
• Deleting the original title list will cause the playlist to be  
deleted as well.  
Editing the original title list, or changing the recording mode  
may cause the playlist to be deleted.  
VKVNG  
00  
&+8+&'  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
4 Select “CHANGE”, and press the [OK] button  
• The displayed still image now becomes the thumbnail  
image.  
Editing a Thumbnail  
Thumbnails (index images) can be changed to a still image  
according to your preference.  
5 Select “CONFIRM”, and press the [OK] button  
• Doing so ends the editing of thumbnails.  
Memo:  
• Thumbnails of titles stored on the HDD, BD-RE, BD-R,  
DVD-RW, and DVD-R can be edited.  
• However, thumbnails of titles that are stored on an SD card  
or finalized disc cannot be edited.  
Memo:  
• You can also display the thumbnail modification screen from  
the Playback Navigation screen.  
A Select the title for which the thumbnail is to be  
changed, and press the [OPTION] button  
B Select “EDIT INFO”, and press the [OK] button  
1 Press the [INFORMATION CORRECT] button on  
the remote control unit  
• An information editing screen appears.  
• An information editing screen appears.  
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
126+105  
2+%674'  
$#%-  
2.#;  
)4172  
#..  
&'.'6'  
&7$  
001  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
+0(14/#6+10ꢀ%144'%6  
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'  
'&+6  
/1&+(;ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ0#/'  
/1&+(;ꢀ6*7/$0#+.  
%*#0)'ꢀ5*116+0)ꢀ&#6'ꢁ6+/'  
2416'%6  
'&+6ꢂ+0(1  
16*'45  
VKVNG  
00  
00  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
C Select “MODIFY THUMBNAIL”, and press the [OK]  
button  
• A thumbnail modification screen appears.  
2 Select “MODIFY THUMBNAIL”, and press the [OK]  
button  
• A thumbnail modification screen appears.  
6+6.' ꢁ6*7/$0#+.ꢂ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
3 Play the video, and press the [ ] button to  
W
4'/#+0 ꢃꢄꢃ  
2+%674'  
stop at the scene you want to use as thumbnail  
display  
2CIG  
)4172  
#..  
+0(14/#6+10ꢀ%144'%6  
/1&+(;ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ0#/'  
001  
0
00  
00  
/1&+(;ꢃ6*7/$0#+.  
/1&+(;ꢀ6*7/$0#+.  
VKVNG  
%*#0)'ꢀ5*116+0)ꢀ&#6'ꢅ6+/'  
;17ꢃ%#0ꢃ%*#0)'ꢃ6*'ꢃ6+6.'ꢃ6*7/$0#+.5  
;17ꢃ%#0ꢃ'&+6ꢃ6*'ꢃ6+6.'ꢃ61ꢃ8+'9ꢃ$;ꢃ%*#26'45  
2416'%6  
00  
0
ꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀ  
%*#0)'  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
%10(+4/  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'6740  
6*7/$0#+.  
- : -- : --  
5'.'%6  
1-  
':+6  
+0(1ꢂ%144'%6  
126+10  
4'6740  
Memo:  
• For details on how to play videos, refer to "Video Playback  
Operation" (A page 51) .  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Editing a chapter  
1 Press the [EDIT] button on the remote control  
Editing a Chapter  
Creating a chapter mark for a saved title enables you to find a  
specific scene within the title.  
unit  
• The Edit menu screen appears.  
Memo:  
2 Select “CHAPTER EDIT”, and press the [OK]  
button  
• The title screen appears.  
• All chapter editing functions can be performed on titles  
stored on the HDD.  
Titles stored on a BD-RE (BDAV), BD-R (BDAV), DVD-R  
(VR), or DVD-RW (VR) only allow chapters to be divided or  
combined.  
• The chapters of titles that are stored on an SD card or  
finalized disc cannot be edited.  
• Also, protected titles cannot be edited. To perform chapter  
'&+6  
%*#26'4ꢀ'&+6  
2.#;.+56ꢀ'&+6  
edit of a title, turn off the protection.  
For details on turning off protection of a title, refer to "Turning  
Off Title/Group Protection" (A page 64) .  
&'.'6'ꢀ5%'0'  
&+8+&'  
Chapter edit functions  
• Chapter mark insertion (divide chapter)  
Divides a chapter by inserting a chapter mark.  
• Chapter mark deletion (combine chapters)  
Combine chapters by deleting the chapter mark.  
• Chapter deletion  
3 Select a title, and press the [OK] button  
Memo:  
• The chapter edit screen can also be called up from the  
Playback Navigation screen.  
Deletes a specified chapter.  
A Select the title to perform chapter edit, and press the  
[OPTION] button  
B Select “EDIT”, and press the [OK] button  
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
126+105  
2+%674'  
$#%-  
2.#;  
)4172  
#..  
&'.'6'  
&7$  
001  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
&1ꢂ016ꢂ)4172  
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'  
'&+6  
VKVNG  
'&+6ꢂ+0(1  
16*'45  
00  
00  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
C Select “CHAPTER EDIT”, and press the [OK] button  
6+6.'ꢁ6*7/$0#+.ꢂ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
4'/#+0 ꢃꢄꢃ  
2+%674'  
2CIG  
)4172  
#..  
'&+6  
001  
0
0
00  
00  
%*#26'4ꢀ'&+6  
2.#;.+56ꢀ'&+6  
&'.'6'ꢀ5%'0'  
VKVNG  
00  
&+8+&'  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
• For details on how to play videos, refer to "Video Playback  
Operation" (A page 51) .  
• Frame movement on the Chapter Edit screen can only be  
performed one frame at a time regardless of the “STILL  
MODE” (A page 77) setting.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
o
Deleting a video chapter  
Editing a Chapter  
(Continued)  
1 Select the chapter for which you want to delete  
the video from the chapter edit screen  
2 Press the [DELETE] button on the remote control  
unit  
o
Chapter mark insertion (divide chapter)  
• A confirmation screen for deleting the chapter appears.  
1 Play the video, and press the [ ] button to stop  
W
at the scene you want to add a chapter mark  
%%**##2266''4ꢀ4'ꢀ&'+&6+6  
2 Press the [MARK] button on the remote control  
unit  
;17ꢀ%#0ꢀ'&+6ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ61ꢀ8+'9ꢀ$;ꢀ%*#26'45  
2CIG  
• A chapter mark is inserted into the paused scene.  
%*#26'4ꢀ'&+6  
6*'ꢀ52'%+(+'&ꢀ%*#26'4ꢀ9+..ꢀ$'ꢀ&'.'6'&  
&'.'6'&ꢀ&#6#ꢀ%#0016ꢀ$'ꢀ4'5614'&  
%**##2266''4ꢀ4'ꢀ&'+&6+6  
;17ꢀ%#0ꢀ'&+6ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ61ꢀ8+'9ꢀ$;ꢀ%*#26'45  
;17ꢀ%#0ꢀ'&+6ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ61ꢀ8+'9ꢀ$;ꢀ%*#26'45  
2CIG  
&'.'6'  
%#0%'.  
001  
0 : 00 : 00  
%10(+4/  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
':+6  
'&+6  
4'6740  
3 Select “DELETE”, and press the [OK] button  
• The selected video chapter is deleted.  
001  
0 : 00 : 00  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
24'8ꢀ2)  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
':+6  
'&+6  
1-  
Note:  
4'6740  
• Videos cannot be restored once they are deleted.  
• Deletion of the video may fail if the length of the chapter is  
too short.  
Memo:  
• The chapter is now divided into two parts at the position of  
the chapter mark.  
Chapter options  
o
Chapter mark deletion (combine chapters)  
Pressing the [OPTION] button on the remote control when the  
Chapter Edit screen is displayed enables you to perform the  
following editing operations.  
1 Play the video, and press the [ ] and [  
/
]
W
H I  
buttons to display the scene for which you want  
to delete the chapter mark  
o
Combining with previous chapter  
2 Press the [MARK] button on the remote control  
• Combines the selected chapter with the previous chapter.  
A Select a chapter, followed by “COMB. W/PREV CH”,  
and press the [OK] button  
unit  
• A confirmation screen for deleting the chapter mark  
appears.  
• Combines chapters.  
%*#26'4ꢀ'&+6  
o
Combining with next chapter  
;17ꢀ%#0ꢀ'&+6ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ61ꢀ8+'9ꢀ$;ꢀ%*#26'45  
2CIG  
• Combines the selected chapter with the next chapter.  
A Select a chapter, followed by “COMB. W/NEXT CH”,  
and press the [OK] button  
%*#26'4ꢀ'&+6  
%*#26'4ꢀ/#4-ꢀ#.4'#&;ꢀ':+565ꢁ  
&1ꢀ;17ꢀ9#06ꢀ61ꢀ&'.'6'ꢀ6*'  
':+56+0)ꢀ%*#26'4ꢀ/#4-!  
• Combines chapters.  
;'5  
01  
o
Combining all chapters  
• Combines all chapters.  
001  
0 : 00 : 00  
A Select “COMB. ALL CHAP.”, and press the [OK]  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
':+6  
'&+6  
button  
4'6740  
• A confirmation screen for combining all the chapters is  
displayed.  
B Select “YES”, and press the [OK] button  
3 Select “YES”, and press the [OK] button  
• The chapter mark is deleted from the selected scene.  
• Combines all the chapters.  
Memo:  
• The chapters before and after the position of the chapter  
mark are now combined.  
• Pressing the [  
/
] button displays the next/previous  
S
T
page.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
6 Select “EXECUTE”, and press the [OK] button  
• A confirmation screen for performing dividing appears.  
Dividing  
You can select a saved title and divide it into two titles.  
&+8+&'  
Memo:  
;17ꢀ%#0ꢀ&+8+&'ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+6.'  
'&+6ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+ .'ꢀ61ꢀ8+'9ꢀ$;ꢀ%*#26'45  
• Dividing can only be applied to titles stored on the HDD.  
• Titles that are protected cannot be divided. To divide a title,  
turn off the protection.  
For details on turning off the title protection, refer to "Turning  
Off Title/Group Protection" (A page 64) .  
&+8+&+0)ꢀ21+06  
':'%76'  
14+)+0#.  
&+8+&+0)ꢀ21+06  
Dividing  
001  
0 : 00 : 00  
- : -- : --  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
4'6740  
1 Press the [EDIT] button on the remote control  
'&+6  
126+10  
unit  
• The Edit menu screen appears.  
7 Select “DIVIDE”, and press the [OK] button  
• Dividing starts.  
2 Select “DIVIDE”, and press the [OK] button  
• The title screen appears.  
&+8+&'  
;17ꢀ%#0ꢀ&+8+&'ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+6.'  
'&+6ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+ .'ꢀ61ꢀ8+'9ꢀ$;ꢀ%*#26'45  
&+8+&'  
'&+6  
70#$.'ꢀ61ꢀ4'5614'ꢀ6*'ꢀ14+)+0#.ꢀ&#6#ꢀ10%'ꢀ+6ꢀ+5ꢀ&+8+&'&ꢁ  
&1ꢀ;17ꢀ9#06ꢀ61ꢀ&+8+&'!  
%*#26'4ꢀ'&+6  
2.#;.+56ꢀ'&+6  
&+8+&'  
%#0%'.  
&'.'6'ꢀ5%'0'  
&+8+&'  
14+)+0#.  
&+8+&+0)ꢀ21+06  
001  
0 : 00 : 00  
- : -- : --  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
'&+6  
1-  
4'6740  
126+10  
3 Select a title, and press the [OK] button  
4 Play the video, and press the [ ] button at the  
W
scene where you want to perform dividing  
5 Select “DIVIDING POINT”, and press the [OK]  
button  
&+8+&'  
;17ꢀ%#0ꢀ&+8+&'ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+6.'  
;17ꢀ%#0ꢀ'&+6ꢀ6*'ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ61ꢀ8+'9ꢀ$;ꢀ%*#26'45  
&+8+&+0)ꢀ21+06  
':'%76'  
14+)+0#.  
&+8+&+0)ꢀ21+06  
001  
0 : 00 : 00  
- : -- : --  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
4'6740  
':+6  
'&+6  
Memo:  
• For details on how to play videos, refer to "Video Playback  
Operation" (A page 51) .  
• Frame movement on the Chapter Edit screen can only be  
performed one frame at a time regardless of the “STILL  
MODE” (A page 77) setting.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Memo:  
Delete Scenes  
Unwanted scenes of a saved title can be deleted.  
Doing so helps to increase the free space on the disc.  
• To cancel the dividing operation, select “CANCEL” and  
press the [OK] button.  
• Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
the divide operation and return to the initial screen.  
Memo:  
• The dividing edit screen can also be called up from the  
Playback Navigation screen.  
• Deleting scenes can only be applied to titles stored on the  
HDD.  
A Select the titles to divide, and press the [OPTION]  
button  
B Select “EDIT”, and press the [OK] button  
• Titles that are protected cannot be deleted. To enable scene  
delete of a title, turn off the protection.  
For details on turning off the title protection, refer to "Turning  
Off Title/Group Protection" (A page 64) .  
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
126+105  
2+%674'  
• HD content for which the delete scene operation has been  
applied cannot be dubbed to BDMV. Perform seamless  
conversion before starting a dubbing operation.  
$#%-  
2.#;  
)4172  
#..  
&'.'6'  
&7$  
001  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
For details, refer to "Mode conversion" (A page 73) .  
&1ꢂ016ꢂ)4172  
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'  
'&+6  
VKVNG  
'&+6ꢂ+0(1  
16*'45  
00  
00  
Delete Scenes  
1 Press the [EDIT] button on the remote control  
unit  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
• The Edit menu screen appears.  
4'6740  
2 Select “DELETE SCENE”, and press the [OK]  
button  
C Select “DIVIDE”, and press the [OK] button  
• Displays the Title Display screen.  
6+6.' ꢁ6*7/$0#+.ꢂ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
4'/#+0 ꢃꢄꢃ  
2+%674'  
2CIG  
)4172  
#..  
'&+6  
001  
0
0
00  
00  
%*#26'4ꢀ'&+6  
2.#;.+56ꢀ'&+6  
&'.'6'ꢀ5%'0'  
'&+6  
VKVNG  
%*#26'4ꢀ'&+6  
2.#;.+56ꢀ'&+6  
00  
&+8+&'  
&'.'6'ꢀ5%'0'  
&+8+&'  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
3 Select a title, and press the [OK] button  
4 Edit the delete scene section  
Follow the steps below to edit the section for which delete  
scene is to be applied.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
A Play the video, and press the [ ] button at the point  
where you want to start the delete operation  
B Select “START”, and press the [OK] button  
W
5 Select “EXECUTE”, and press the [OK] button  
• A confirmation screen for performing scene delete appears.  
6 Select “EXECUTE”, and press the [OK] button  
• Scene deletion starts.  
&'.'6'ꢂ5%'0'  
;17ꢂ%#0ꢂ&'.'6'ꢂ5%'0'5  
ꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢀ  
&'.'6'ꢃ5%'0'  
;17ꢃ%#0ꢃ&'.'6'ꢃ5%'0'5  
56#46  
'0&  
ꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢂ  
0':6  
&'.'6'ꢃ5%'0'  
':'%76'  
6*'ꢃ52'%+(+'&ꢃ5'%6+10ꢃꢄ::ꢃ5')/'06ꢄ5ꢅꢅꢃ9+..ꢃ$'ꢃ&'.'6'&  
':'%76'  
56#46  
%#0%'.  
56#46  
'0&  
- : -- : --  
- : -- : --  
'0&  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
4'6740  
':+6  
'&+6  
001  
0 : 00 : 00  
001  
1-  
4'6740  
0 : 00 : 09  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
':+6  
'&+6  
C Play the video, and press the [ ] button at the point  
W
where you want to end the delete operation  
D Select “END”, and press the [OK] button  
Memo:  
• To cancel the delete scene operation, select “CANCEL” and  
press the [OK] button.  
• Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
delete scene and return to the initial screen.  
&'.'6'ꢃ5%'0'  
;17ꢃ%#0ꢃ&'.'6'ꢃ5%'0'5  
ꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢀꢂ  
56#46  
'0&  
0':6  
':'%76'  
56#46  
'0&  
001  
0 : 00 : 03  
- : -- : --  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
4'6740  
':+6  
'&+6  
E To continue specifying other sections to delete,  
select “NEXT”, and press the [OK] button  
&'.'6'ꢄ5%'0'  
;17ꢄ%#0ꢄ&'.'6'ꢄ5%'0'5  
ꢀꢁꢀꢀꢁꢂꢃ  
56#46  
'0&  
0':6  
':'%76'  
56#46  
'0&  
001  
0 : 00 : 03  
001  
1-  
4'6740  
0 : 00 : 17  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
':+6  
'&+6  
F Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to specify the sections to delete  
Memo:  
• For details on how to play videos, refer to "Video Playback  
Operation" (A page 51) .  
• Frame movement on the Chapter Edit screen can only be  
performed one frame at a time regardless of the “STILL  
MODE” (A page 77) setting.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
Changing the Disc Name  
Changing the Shooting  
Date/Time  
The name of a BD or DVD disc can be changed as follows.  
1 Set the BD or DVD for which the disc name is to  
The date/time of the stored video can be changed as follows.  
be changed on the disc tray  
• The shooting date/time of videos stored on the HDD can be  
2 Press the [MEDIA MANAGE] button on the remote  
control unit  
• The Media Management menu screen appears.  
changed.  
1 Press the [INFORMATION CORRECT] button on  
the remote control unit  
• An information correct screen appears.  
/'&+#ꢀ/#0#)'/'06  
$&ꢁ&8&  
(14/#6  
(+0#.+<'  
4'0#/'ꢀ&+5%  
5&ꢀ%#4&  
+0(14/#6+10ꢀ%144'%6  
/1&+(;ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ0#/'  
/1&+(;ꢀ6*7/$0#+.  
%*#0)'ꢀ5*116+0)ꢀ&#6'ꢁ6+/'  
2416'%6  
(14/#6  
$&ꢂ8+&'1ꢀ&#6#ꢀ'4#5'  
*&&  
(14/#6  
3 Select “RENAME DISC” under “BD/DVD”, and  
press the [OK] button  
• A disc name modification screen appears.  
2 Select “CHANGE SHOOTING DATE/TIME”, and  
press the [OK] button  
• A thumbnail screen appears.  
4'0#/'ꢎ&+5%  
3 Select the title for which the shooting date/time is  
to be changed, and press the [OK] button  
2.'#5'ꢎ4'0#/'ꢎ6*'ꢎ&+5%  
• The screen for changing the shooting date/time appears.  
ꢀꢁ!ꢂꢃ  
IJKꢅ  
CDEꢄ  
LMNꢆ  
FGHꢍ  
OPQꢇ  
24'8ꢀꢎ%*#4#%6'4  
2#)'ꢎ248  
4 Change the shooting date/time  
• Perform the following steps to change the shooting date/  
0':6ꢎ%*#4#%6'4  
2#)'ꢎ0':6  
time.  
RSTUꢈ  
VWXꢉ  
ꢊ
YZ[\ꢌ  
ꢋ
%*#4#%6'4ꢎ6;2'  
%.'#4  
6+6.' ꢄ6*7/$0#+.ꢅ  
+0(1ꢀꢁ%144'%6  
8+&'1  
2+%674'  
4'/#+0 ꢂꢃꢂ  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
2CIG  
1-  
4'6740  
':+6  
%10(+4/  
/'&+#ꢎ/#0#)'  
)4172  
#..  
%*#0)'ꢁ5*116+0)ꢁ&#6'ꢉ6+/'  
;'#4  
/106*ꢉ&#;  
6+/'  
ꢂꢆꢆꢇ  
,#0ꢉꢆꢊ  
ꢃꢈꢂꢂ  
4 Modifying the Disc Name  
• The new disc name is now saved.  
'06'4  
Memo:  
• For details on the method of character input, refer to  
"Entering Characters" (A page 59) .  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢁ2)  
0':6ꢁ2)  
':+6  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
+0(1ꢀꢁ%144'%6  
4'6740  
A Use the [ ] and [ ] buttons to move the cursor to  
J
K
the item you want to change  
B Press the [OK] button to display the pop-up screen  
C Use the [ ] and [ ] buttons to select a desired  
J
K
value  
D Press the [OK] button to choose the value  
E Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to change settings for any  
desired items  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
5 Select “ENTER”, and press the [OK] button  
• The modified shooting date/time is saved.  
Mode conversion  
You can convert HD quality video titles saved on the HDD if  
they are recorded in the DR, AVC, AF, AN, AL, or AE mode.  
Memo:  
• Alternatively, you can press the [RETURN] button to cancel  
the shooting date/time modification and return to the initial  
screen.  
Seamless  
: Seamless conversion can be performed to  
enable smooth playback of joined scenes  
after dubbing to a BD. (Titles recorded in the  
DR recording mode h seamless)  
conversion  
• The shooting date/time modification will not be reflected on  
a title that was dubbed.  
Recording  
mode  
conversion  
: Enables conversion of recording mode.  
(Titles recorded in the DR, AVC, AF, AN, AL,  
or AE mode h AF/AN/AL/AE/XP/SP/LP/EP)  
• Pressing the [OPTION] button in the playback navigation  
screen instead of the [INFORMATION CORRECT] button  
will also display the shooting date/time edit screen.  
A Select the title for which the shooting date/time is to  
be changed, and press the [OPTION] button  
Memo:  
• As seamless conversion does not re-encode video and  
B Select “EDIT INFO”, and press the [OK] button  
audio, there is no deterioration in the image quality.  
• Re-encoding is performed during recording mode  
conversion.  
6+6.' ꢀ6*7/$0#+.ꢁ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
126+105  
2+%674'  
• Only titles that are recorded in the DR mode enable  
conversion to the XP/SP/LP/EP mode.  
• To apply “MODE CHANGE” after turning off the power,  
select “AFTER POWER OFF” for “START METHOD” under  
the “MODE CHANGE”.  
$#%-  
2.#;  
)4172  
#..  
&'.'6'  
&7$  
001  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
/1&'ꢂ%*#0)'  
'&+6  
'&+6ꢂ+0(1  
16*'45  
VKVNG  
00  
00  
Note:  
• When seamless conversion is performed, the chapters  
(excluding joints of scenes) will be combined. To divide the  
chapters, insert chapter marks after seamless conversion.  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢂ2)  
0':6ꢂ2)  
':+6  
0#8+)#6+10  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
4'6740  
For details on dividing the chapters, refer to “Chapter mark  
insertion” (A page 68).  
C Select “CHANGE SHOOTING DATE/TIME”, and press  
the [OK] button  
1 Press the [NAVIGATION] button on the remote  
control  
6+6.' ꢁ6*7/$0#+.ꢂ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
2 Select a title/group, and press the [OPTION]  
4'/#+0 ꢃꢄꢃ  
2+%674'  
button  
2CIG  
)4172  
#..  
3 Select “MODE CHANGE” from the Option menu,  
and press the [OK] button  
• The “MODE CHANGE” screen appears.  
+0(14/#6+10ꢀ%144'%6  
/1&+(;ꢀ6+6.'ꢀ0#/'  
001  
0
00  
00  
/1&+(;ꢀ6*7/$0#+.  
VKVNG  
%*#0)'ꢀ5*116+0)ꢀ&#6'ꢅ6+/'  
2416'%6  
00  
0
6+6.' ꢂ6*7/$0#+.ꢃ  
0#8+)#6+10  
8+&'1  
ꢀꢁꢀ  
4'/#+0  
2+%674'  
2CIG  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
':+6  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
24'8ꢀ2)  
0':6ꢀ2)  
0#8+)#6+10  
)4172  
#..  
4'6740  
/1&'ꢄ%*#0)'  
/1&'  
56#46ꢄ/'6*1&  
5'#/.'55  
+//'&+#6'  
%10(+4/  
5'.'%6  
126+10  
1-  
24'8ꢄ2)  
0':6ꢄ2)  
':+6  
.+56  
2+%674'  
)4172  
0#8+)#6+10  
4'6740  
4 Select a recording mode from “MODE CHANGE”,  
and press the [OK] button  
5 Select “CONFIRM”, and press the [OK] button  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Settings Menu  
DOWN MIX ....................................................... (A page 78)  
DIGITAL OUT.................................................... (A page 78)  
PCM DOWN SAMPLING............................... (A page 78)  
Dolby Digital................................................... (A page 78)  
Dolby Digital Plus/TrueHD............................. (A page 78)  
DTS................................................................ (A page 78)  
DTS-HD ......................................................... (A page 79)  
AAC ............................................................... (A page 79)  
DV IN AUDIO SETTING.................................... (A page 79)  
BD MIX SOUND................................................ (A page 79)  
DISPLAY............................................................... (A page 79)  
ON SCREEN GUIDE ........................................ (A page 79)  
BLUE BACK...................................................... (A page 79)  
SCREEN SAVER .............................................. (A page 79)  
OSD LANGUAGE ............................................. (A page 79)  
CONNECTION ..................................................... (A page 80)  
MONITOR TYPE............................................... (A page 80)  
HDMI CONNECTION........................................ (A page 80)  
VIDEO PRIORITY MODE.............................. (A page 80)  
HDMI OUTPUT RESOLUTION ..................... (A page 80)  
BD-VIDEO 24p OUT...................................... (A page 80)  
x.v.Color......................................................... (A page 81)  
Deep Color..................................................... (A page 81)  
HDMI RGB OUTPUT RANGE ....................... (A page 81)  
HDMI --> DVI COLOR ................................... (A page 81)  
HDMI AUDIO OUTPUT.................................. (A page 81)  
HDMI-CEC ........................................................ (A page 81)  
COMPONENT OUTPUT................................... (A page 81)  
VIDEO INPUT SETTING................................... (A page 81)  
Changing Settings of this  
Unit  
Settings changed in the Settings Menu screen are stored on  
this unit even when its power is turned off.  
Displaying the Settings Menu  
1 Press the [SET UP] button on the remote control  
unit  
• The Settings Menu screen appears.  
Memo:  
• When playback is in progress, pressing the button stops it  
and displays the Settings Menu screen.  
• The cursor position appears at the position when the screen  
was last closed.  
Setting Menu List  
The following items can be set. Items that cannot be set  
cannot be selected.  
SETUP.................................................................. (A page 75)  
AUTO POWER (OFF)....................................... (A page 75)  
REMOTE CONTROL CODE............................. (A page 75)  
CLOCK SET/DISPLAY...................................... (A page 75)  
CLOCK SET .................................................. (A page 75)  
DATE DISPLAY.............................................. (A page 75)  
TIME DISPLAY CHOICE ............................... (A page 75)  
PANEL DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS ...................... (A page 75)  
DIMMER (POWER ON)................................. (A page 75)  
DIMMER (POWER OFF)............................... (A page 76)  
QUICK STARTUP ............................................. (A page 76)  
BUZZER OUTPUT............................................ (A page 76)  
REMOTE CONTROL SENSOR TONE.......... (A page 76)  
ALERT/WARNING TONE.............................. (A page 76)  
DEFAULT SETTING.......................................... (A page 76)  
PLAYBACK SETTING .......................................... (A page 76)  
BD-/DVD-VIDEO PB SETTING......................... (A page 76)  
BD-VIDEO RATINGS..................................... (A page 76)  
COUNTRY CODE.......................................... (A page 76)  
AUDIO LANGUAGE ...................................... (A page 76)  
SUBTITLE LANGUAGE................................. (A page 76)  
MENU LANGUAGE ....................................... (A page 76)  
RESUME........................................................... (A page 77)  
STILL MODE..................................................... (A page 77)  
SEAMLESS PLAYBACK................................... (A page 77)  
RECORD.............................................................. (A page 77)  
XP MODE RECORDING AUDIO ...................... (A page 77)  
HIGH-SPEED DUBBING .................................. (A page 77)  
VIDEO MODE RECORDING ASPECT.......... (A page 77)  
DISC RECORDING AUDIO........................... (A page 78)  
AUDIO .................................................................. (A page 78)  
DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL ......................... (A page 78)  
Memo:  
• The highlighted value is the default setting.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Settings Menu  
• CLOCK SET  
Sets the current date and time.  
Setup  
Memo:  
• For details on the setting procedures, refer to "Setting the  
5'672  
date/time" (A page 20) .  
#761ꢀ219'4ꢀꢁ1((ꢂ  
1((  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀ%1&'  
%.1%-ꢀ5'6ꢄ&+52.#;  
2#0'.ꢀ&+52.#;ꢀ$4+)*60'55  
37+%-ꢀ56#4672  
4'/16'ꢀ%10641.ꢀꢃ  
• DATE DISPLAY  
For setting the date (year, month, and day) display format.  
1((  
$7<<'4ꢀ176276  
Setting Values  
Description  
&'(#7.6ꢀ5'66+0)  
5QHVYCTGꢀ8GTUKQPꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀZZZZZꢅZZZZZꢅZZZZZ  
YEAR.MONTH.DAY Displays the date in the year/month/  
day order.  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
MONTH.DAY.YEAR Displays the date in the month/day/  
year order.  
5'672  
4'6740  
DAY.MONTH.YEAR Displays the date in the day/month/  
year order.  
o
AUTO POWER (OFF)  
You can specify a time for the power of the unit to turn off  
automatically when it is not being operated.  
• TIME DISPLAY CHOICE  
For setting the time display format.  
Setting Values  
OFF  
Description  
Setting Values  
Description  
Power does not turn off automatically.  
Turns off power after two hours.  
Turns off power after six hours.  
12H  
24H  
Displays the time in AM/PM format.  
Displays the time in 24-hour format.  
2 HOURS  
6 HOURS  
o
PANEL DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS  
o
REMOTE CONTROL CODE  
The brightness of the display window can be specified using  
the “DIMMER (POWER ON)”, and “DIMMER (POWER OFF)”  
control items.  
Different remote control codes can be specified for those that  
are used with this unit.  
• DIMMER (POWER ON)  
Setting Values  
Description  
For setting the brightness of the display window when the  
power is turned "On".  
REMOTE CONTROL 1 Sets remote control code to 1.  
REMOTE CONTROL 2 Sets remote control code to 2.  
REMOTE CONTROL 3 Sets remote control code to 3.  
REMOTE CONTROL 4 Sets remote control code to 4.  
Setting Values Description  
BRIGHT  
DIMMED1  
DIMMED2  
DIMMED3  
OFF  
Bright  
Slightly dim  
Dim  
o
CLOCK SET/DISPLAY  
The current date/time and the display format on the screen  
can be specified using the “CLOCK SET”, “DATE DISPLAY”,  
and “TIME DISPLAY CHOICE” items.  
Dimmer  
Off  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Settings Menu  
• DIMMER (POWER OFF)  
For turning on/off the light of the display window when the  
power is turned "Off".  
Playback Setting  
Setting Values  
Description  
2.#;$#%-ꢀ5'66+0)  
$&ꢁꢂ&8&ꢁ8+&'1ꢀ2$ꢀ5'66+0)  
OFF  
ON  
Turns off the light.  
Turns on the light.  
4'57/'  
10  
#761  
10  
56+..ꢀ/1&'  
5'#/.'55ꢀ2.#;$#%-  
o
QUICK STARTUP  
The quick startup setting can be specified as follows.  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
5'672  
4'6740  
OFF  
Starts up in the normal way.  
o
BD-/DVD-VIDEO PB SETTING  
ON  
Operation is speedily enabled after turning  
on the power. (Quick start)  
BD-Video and DVD-Video playback settings can be specified  
using the “BD-VIDEO RATINGS”, “COUNTRY CODE”,  
“AUDIO LANGUAGE”, “SUBTITLE LANGUAGE”, and “MENU  
LANGUAGE” items.  
Memo:  
• Setting to “ON” increases power consumption while the unit  
is in the standby mode.  
• BD-VIDEO RATINGS  
For setting the lower age limit for BD-Video ratings.  
o
BUZZER OUTPUT  
Setting Values  
Description  
The buzzer setting can be specified as follows.  
• REMOTE CONTROL SENSOR TONE  
NO LIMIT  
All BD-Videos can be viewed.  
For setting whether to sound the buzzer when the remote  
control sensor receives signals.  
254YEAR(S)-  
0YEAR(S)  
BD-Videos that are subject to the age  
limit cannot be viewed.  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
Memo:  
• In order to set the restrictions, password (four-digit  
OFF  
Buzzer does not sound when the remote  
control sensor receives signals.  
number) registration is required.  
• The password status becomes unregistered if the  
restriction setting is disabled. A new password can be  
registered after setting the age limit again.  
ON  
Sounds the buzzer when the remote control  
sensor receives signals.  
• It is recommended that you note down the password in  
case it is lost or forgotten.  
• ALERT/WARNING TONE  
For setting whether to sound the buzzer when an operation is  
completed or when a warning message appears.  
• COUNTRY CODE  
For setting the country code.  
For details on the country codes, refer to the "Country Code  
List" (A page 96) .  
Setting Values  
Description  
OFF  
ON  
Buzzer does not sound.  
Sounds the buzzer.  
Memo:  
• If the “BD-VIDEO RATINGS” setting is specified, you will  
be required to enter the password registered for the “BD-  
VIDEO RATINGS” in order to change the “COUNTRY  
CODE”.  
o
DEFAULT SETTING  
Restores the setting values on the setting screen to their  
factory default values.  
• AUDIO LANGUAGE  
For setting the audio sound when playing back BD-Videos  
or DVD-Videos.  
For details on the language codes, refer to the "Language  
Code List" (A page 94) .  
Setting Values  
Description  
YES  
NO  
Restores the factory default values.  
Returns to the initial screen without  
resetting the values.  
• SUBTITLE LANGUAGE  
For setting the subtitle language when playing back BD-  
Videos or DVD-Videos.  
For details on the language codes, refer to the "Language  
Code List" (A page 94) .  
Memo:  
• “BD-VIDEO RATINGS” and “COUNTRY CODE” settings  
cannot be reset once they have been specified.  
• MENU LANGUAGE  
For setting the menu language when playing back BD-  
Videos or DVD-Videos.  
For details on the language codes, refer to the "Language  
Code List" (A page 94) .  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Settings Menu  
o
RESUME  
Record  
The stop position can be stored when playback of a BD-  
Video, DVD-Video, BDMV, AVCHD, finalized discs, or SD card  
is stopped halfway.  
4'%14&  
&QND[ꢀ&KIKVCN  
:2ꢀ/1&'ꢀ4'%14&+0)ꢀ#7&+1  
*+)*ꢁ52''&ꢀ&7$$+0)  
Setting Values  
Description  
OFF  
ON  
Resume information is not stored.  
Stores resume information.  
Memo:  
• Resume information is stored at all times for other discs as  
well as the HDD regardless of this setting.  
• When a HDD title is selected using Playback Navigation, it  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
4'6740  
5'672  
is played back from the beginning.  
• Some discs do not allow playback from the resume point.  
o
XP MODE RECORDING AUDIO  
For changing the settings of audio mode during recording in  
the XP mode.  
o
STILL MODE  
For setting the method for displaying paused images during  
playback of the HDD or a disc.  
Setting Values  
Dolby Digital  
LPCM  
Description  
Records in “Dolby Digital”.  
Records in “LPCM”.  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
AUTO  
Automatic control.  
o
HIGH-SPEED DUBBING  
FIELD  
Use this setting for moving images or when  
there is blurring in the “AUTO” mode.  
Items under “VIDEO MODE RECORDING ASPECT” and  
“DISC RECORDING AUDIO” can be set to support high-  
speed dubbing.  
FRAME  
Use this setting when detailed patterns or  
designs are not clear in the “AUTO” mode.  
• VIDEO MODE RECORDING ASPECT  
For setting the aspect ratio during recording.  
Memo:  
• This setting is disabled for programs in the DR mode and  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
during playback of AVCHD videos.  
AUTO  
Performs recording in the aspect ratio  
setting when recording starts.  
o
SEAMLESS PLAYBACK  
For setting the method for playing back partially erased  
scenes.  
4:3  
Records at the fixed aspect ratio of 4:3.  
Records at the fixed aspect ratio of 16:9.  
16:9  
Setting Values  
Description  
OFF  
ON  
Plays back with high accuracy.  
Plays back smoothly.  
Memo:  
• High-speed dubbing to a DVD-Video disc cannot be  
performed when there are different aspect ratios in a title.  
In this case, fix the aspect ratio to 4:3 or 16:9. This setting  
remains valid during re-encode dubbing.  
Memo:  
• SD picture quality is retained during re-encode dubbing.  
For details on high-speed dubbing and re-encode dubbing,  
refer to the "Dubbing chart" (A page 24) .  
• For joints of scenes that are 15 seconds or shorter,  
seamless playback may fail even when it is set to “ON”.  
The same applies during re-encode dubbing in the SD  
picture quality.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Settings Menu  
• DISC RECORDING AUDIO  
For changing the settings of audio to be recorded to the disc  
when in the AF, AN, AE or AL mode.  
o
DIGITAL OUT  
Set this item according to the device connected to the digital  
audio output terminal (optical digital).  
• PCM DOWN SAMPLING  
For specifying settings on sampling frequency conversion.  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
AUTO  
Records "Stereo", "Surround" or "Dual  
broadcast" audio sounds as they are.  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
FIXED  
Records "Stereo" and "Surround" sounds in  
"Stereo". "Dual broadcast" audio sounds are  
recorded as they are.  
OFF  
Sampling frequency is not converted.  
ON  
Audio recorded at a sampling frequency of 96  
kHz or 88.2 kHz is converted to 48 kHz and  
44.1 kHz respectively.  
Memo:  
• Surround sounds of a title become stereo sounds when re-  
Memo:  
encode dubbing is performed.  
• Setting to “OFF” may produce the same effects as the “ON”  
mode for some discs.  
Audio  
• Dolby Digital  
For setting audio output to “BITSTREAM” or “PCM”.  
Setting Values  
Description  
#7&+1  
&;0#/+%ꢀ4#0)'ꢀ%10641.  
&190ꢀ/+:  
10  
BITSTREAM  
Use this setting when connecting a device  
that is able to decode “Dolby Digital”.  
56'4'1  
&+)+6#.ꢀ176  
&8ꢀ+0ꢀ#7&+1ꢀ5'66+0)  
$&ꢀ/+:ꢀ5170&  
56'4'1ꢀꢁ  
10  
PCM  
Audio input will be changed and output as  
“PCM”.  
Use this setting when connecting a device  
that is unable to decode “Dolby Digital”.  
• Dolby Digital Plus/TrueHD  
For setting audio output to “BITSTREAM” or “PCM”.  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
5'672  
4'6740  
Setting Values  
Description  
o
DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL  
BITSTREAM  
Use this setting when connecting a device  
that is able to decode “Dolby Digital Plus/  
TrueHD”.  
For setting the dynamic range compression ratio (ratio  
between the maximum and minimum volume) during Dolby  
Digital playback.  
PCM  
Audio input will be changed and output as  
“PCM”.  
Setting Values  
Description  
Use this setting when connecting a device  
that is unable to decode “Dolby Digital  
Plus/TrueHD”.  
AUTO  
Perform compression only for Dolby  
TrueHD.  
OFF  
ON  
Not compressed.  
• DTS  
Perform maximum compression.  
For setting audio output to “BITSTREAM” or “PCM”.  
Memo:  
Setting Values  
Description  
• Setting to “OFF” may produce the same effects as the “ON”  
BITSTREAM  
Use this setting when connecting a device  
that is able to decode “DTS”.  
mode for some discs.  
• Performing compression allows even the slightest sound to  
be heard clearly.  
• There may be differences in the effect depending on the  
PCM  
Audio input will be changed and output as  
“PCM”.  
Use this setting when connecting a device  
that is unable to decode “DTS”.  
disc used.  
o
DOWN MIX  
For setting whether to output analog audio.  
Setting Values  
Description  
STEREO  
Use this setting when connecting an  
audio amplifier or TV.  
DOLBY  
SURROUND  
Use this setting when connecting  
an amplifier that supports Dolby  
Surround.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Settings Menu  
• DTS-HD  
Display  
For setting audio output to “BITSTREAM” or “PCM”.  
Setting Values  
Description  
&+52.#;  
BITSTREAM  
Use this setting when connecting a device  
that is able to decode “DTS-HD”.  
10ꢀ5%4''0ꢀ)7+&'  
$.7'ꢀ$#%-  
#761  
10  
5%4''0ꢀ5#8'4  
15&ꢀ.#0)7#)'  
10  
PCM  
Audio input will be changed and output as  
“PCM”.  
'0).+5*  
Use this setting when connecting a device  
that is unable to decode “DTS-HD”.  
• AAC  
For setting audio output to “BITSTREAM” or “PCM”.  
5'.'%6  
1-  
4'6740  
':+6  
5'672  
Setting Values  
Description  
BITSTREAM  
Use this setting when connecting a device  
that is able to decode “AAC”.  
o
ON SCREEN GUIDE  
For displaying operation details.  
PCM  
Audio input will be changed and output as  
“PCM”.  
Setting Values  
Description  
Use this setting when connecting a device  
that is unable to decode “AAC”.  
AUTO  
Appears for five seconds when an  
operation is performed.  
OFF  
Not displayed.  
Memo:  
• Audio sound may not be properly played back if the audio  
equipment in use does not support “BITSTREAM” output.  
In this case, set to “PCM”.  
o
BLUE BACK  
For setting the screen display when there is no signal input.  
Setting Values  
Description  
o
DV IN AUDIO SETTING  
For changing the audio recording settings during DV input.  
OFF  
ON  
Displays screen as it is.  
Setting Values  
Description  
Switches display to a blue screen.  
STEREO 1  
Records the audio sound during video  
recording (L1, R1).  
o
SCREEN SAVER  
For setting whether to use a screensaver.  
STEREO 2  
MIX  
Records audio sound that is added later  
(L2, R2), such as during editing.  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
Records “STEREO 1” and “STEREO 2”  
sounds.  
OFF  
ON  
Screen saver is not used.  
Screen saver is used. Switches to the burn-  
in prevention screen when the unit is not  
operated for more than five minutes.  
o
BD MIX SOUND  
For setting a mixture of BD video secondary audio and  
operation sounds output.  
o
OSD LANGUAGE  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
For setting the language for messages displayed on-screen.  
OFF  
Outputs main audio only.  
ON  
Outputs a mixture of BD video secondary  
audio and operation sounds during playback  
of BD-Videos that contain BD video  
secondary audio and menu operation sounds.  
Memo:  
• Output is converted to Dolby Digital or DTS according to  
the main audio when the “DIGITAL OUT” item is set to  
“BITSTREAM”.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Settings Menu  
Connection  
• HDMI OUTPUT RESOLUTION  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
%100'%6+10  
AUTO  
Automatically selects an appropriate  
resolution according to the connected  
device.  
/10+614ꢀ6;2'  
*&/+ꢀ%100'%6+10  
*&/+ꢄ%'%  
1((  
%1/210'06ꢀ176276  
8+&'1ꢀ+0276ꢀ5'66+0)  
ꢁꢂꢃꢂK  
8+&'1  
480p  
1080i  
720p  
1080p  
Fixes the resolution at 480p.  
Fixes the resolution at 1080i.  
Fixes the resolution at 720p.  
Fixes the resolution at 1080p.  
5'.'%6  
':+6  
1-  
5'672  
4'6740  
Memo:  
• When the resolution is set to “720p”, videos are output at  
“1080i” other than those recorded at “720p” even though  
“720p” is shown on the display.  
o
MONITOR TYPE  
For setting the aspect ratio according to the connected  
monitor.  
• Depending on the conditions (monitor type 16:9,resolution  
“720p” and above, aspect 4:3), some of the OSD display  
of the component output may be cut off. In this case, set  
“VIDEO PRIORITY MODE” to “COMPONENT”.  
OSD of the [VIDEO OUT]/[S-VIDEO OUT] terminals may be  
cut off with the above conditions even when “COMPONENT”  
is selected. In this case, set the component resolution to  
“480p” or below, or set the monitor type to other settings  
except 16:9.  
Setting Values  
Description  
16:9  
Set to this value when connected to  
monitors with 16:9 aspect ratio.  
16:9FULL  
Choose this setting when a 16:9 monitor  
is connected to display images without  
the black borders.  
4:3  
PAN&SCAN  
Set to this value when connecting to  
monitors with an aspect ratio of 4:3.  
Plays back videos with the left and right  
edges trimmed off.  
• BD-VIDEO 24p OUT  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
4:3  
Set to this value when connecting to  
monitors with an aspect ratio of 4:3.  
Plays back videos with a black band at  
the upper and lower ends.  
OFF  
Outputs in the resolution set by “HDMI  
OUTPUT RESOLUTION”.  
LETTERBOX  
ON  
Outputs 24p elements at 24p.  
Memo:  
o
HDMI CONNECTION  
• 24p playback is possible for commercially available BD-  
Videos or BDMVs that are recorded in 24p. Content other  
than BDMVs that is dubbed or recorded on this unit at 24p,  
as well as 24p content on SD cards are played back at 60p  
or 60i.  
• This is applicable for BD-ROM and DVD-Video titles.  
This is available when connected to a 24p compatible  
monitor.  
• VIDEO PRIORITY MODE  
Setting Values  
Description  
COMPONENT Set to this value for output at a  
resolution of “480p” or higher from the  
[COMPONENT VIDEO OUT] terminal.  
HDMI  
Set to this value when priority is to  
be given to the “HDMI OUTPUT  
RESOLUTION” setting.  
• Elements other than 24p ones are output at 60p.  
• No video images will be output from the video, S-video and  
component outputs when the HDMI output resolution is at  
1080/24p.  
Memo:  
• During data output from the [HDMI] terminal, setting  
to “COMPONENT” automatically outputs data in the  
“COMPONENT OUTPUT” setting. Setting to “HDMI” outputs  
data in the “HDMI OUTPUT RESOLUTION” setting.  
• During data output from the [HDMI] and [COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT] terminals, setting to “COMPONENT”  
automatically outputs data in the “COMPONENT OUTPUT”  
setting. Setting to “HDMI” outputs data at the “480i”  
resolution from the [COMPONENT VIDEO OUT] terminal.  
• When there is no output from the [HDMI] terminal, data  
is automatically output in the “COMPONENT OUTPUT”  
setting from the [COMPONENT VIDEO OUT] terminal.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Settings Menu  
• x.v.Color  
o
HDMI-CEC  
For setting the HDMI-CEC operation from the connected  
device.  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
Setting Values  
Description  
AUTO  
Outputs x.v.Color information with HDMI  
when video images that include x.v.Color  
information are played back.  
OFF  
ON  
Disables HDMI-CEC.  
Enables HDMI-CEC.  
OFF  
This is applicable when an x.v.Color  
compatible monitor is connected.  
o
COMPONENT OUTPUT  
Memo:  
For setting the resolution of video output from the  
[COMPONENT VIDEO OUT] terminals.  
• This is applicable when an x.v.Color compatible monitor is  
connected.  
Setting Values  
480i  
Description  
• Deep Color  
Sets output to “480i”.  
Sets output to “480p”.  
Sets output to “720p”.  
Sets output to “1080i”.  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
480p  
720p  
AUTO  
Set to this value when a “Deep Color”  
device is connected.  
1080i  
OFF  
Set to this value when the video image is  
distorted, or colors are unnatural.  
Memo:  
• When the resolution is set to “720p”, videos are output at  
“1080i” other than those recorded at “720p” even though  
“720p” is shown on the display.  
• HDMI RGB OUTPUT RANGE  
Setting Values  
Description  
• This unit does not support component output at “1080p”. To  
STANDARD  
ENHANCED  
Set to this value for standard uses.  
output at “1080p”, do so via HDMI connection.  
• If “VIDEO PRIORITY MODE” is set to “HDMI”, the unit will  
output at “480i” regardless of the current setting.  
• If “VIDEO PRIORITY MODE” is set to “COMPONENT”, or  
when a HDMI connection is used, DVD videos will be output  
at “480p” even if “720p” or “1080i” has been set.  
Set to this value when the black and white  
parts of the video image are not distinct.  
Memo:  
• This is available when connected to a DVI device that only  
• The aspect ratio of video/S-video output changes according  
to the component output setting. As such, there may be  
cases where the aspect ratio of the video/S-video output is  
different from the predefined setting of the content.  
supports RGB input.  
• HDMI --> DVI COLOR  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
o
VIDEO INPUT SETTING  
AUTO  
Value is set automatically according to the  
monitor.  
Choose a setting according to the video terminal to be  
connected when an external analog input terminal is used.  
RGB FIX  
Use this setting when video images are not  
correctly displayed on the monitor.  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
Memo:  
VIDEO  
Use this setting when connecting via the  
video (BNC) terminal.  
• This is available when the “x.v.Color” setting is set to “OFF”.  
When the “x.v.Color” setting is set to “AUTO”, this setting  
will be set to “AUTO” automatically.  
S-VIDEO  
Use this setting when connecting via the  
S-video (black) terminal.  
• Change this setting when no video image appears while  
connected to a DVI device.  
• HDMI AUDIO OUTPUT  
Setting  
Values  
Description  
OFF  
Use this setting if you do not want to send  
audio output from the HDMI cable.  
ON  
Use this setting to send audio output from  
the HDMI cable.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Locking the Disc Tray  
Turning on the Mode Lock  
By turning on the lock for the disc tray, the tray cannot be  
Turning on the mode lock disables all operations using the  
buttons on the unit and remote control, except for "Play" and  
"Record".  
opened or closed using the [ ] button.  
M
Memo:  
• When the [ ] button is pressed while the disc tray lock is  
Memo:  
M
turned on, a "LOCKED" message will appear on the display  
window of the unit for about three seconds.  
• When a button that is disabled is pressed, a “LOCKED”  
message will appear on the display window of the unit for  
three seconds.  
Locking the disc tray  
Turning on the mode lock  
1 Press the [ ] button on the unit to turn "Standby"  
A
1 Press the [ ] button on the remote control for  
Z
2 Press and hold the [ ] button on this unit, then  
o
five seconds or longer when in the "Normal  
Recording", "Stop", or "Normal Playback" mode  
• A “LOCKED” message appears on the display window of  
the unit, indicating that the mode lock is turned on.  
press the [ ] button  
M
• A "LOCKED" message appears on the display window of  
the unit, indicating that the disc tray is locked.  
Press the " " button for  
five seconds or longer  
Unlocking the disc tray  
1 Press the [ ] button on the unit to turn "Standby"  
A
2 Press and hold the [ ] button on this unit, then  
o
press the [ ] button  
M
• An "UNLOCK" message appears on the display window of  
the unit, indicating that the disc tray is unlocked.  
Turning off the mode lock  
1 Press the [ ] button on the remote control for  
Z
five seconds or longer when the mode lock is  
turned on  
• An “UNLOCK” message appears on the display window of  
the unit, indicating that the mode lock is turned off.  
Last Function Memory  
When the power plug is disconnected from unit or when  
power failure occurs, your settings for the following functions  
are kept in the memory. These settings will resume when the  
unit is turned on again.  
• Various setting menus (A Page 74 - 81)  
• Deck selection: HDD/BD/SD  
• Recording mode: XP, etc. (A page 28)  
• Input selection: L-1/DV (A page 47)  
• Repeat playback of the disc playback settings menu  
(A page 56)  
Kept for DVD-Video/AVCHD/BDMV and title/chapter only.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
RS-232C Interface  
Command Table  
Lower Order  
Higher Order  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
Complete  
Error  
Cassette  
Out  
Not  
Target  
ACK  
NAK  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Play  
Stop  
Still  
Clear  
Sense  
Title  
Chapter  
Sense  
7
8
Chapter  
Search  
Title  
Date  
Clock  
Search  
Preset  
Preset  
9
Finalize  
Cancel-  
Disc  
Disc  
TOP  
MENU  
NEXT  
PREV  
Setup  
SET  
UP  
DOWN  
RIGHT  
FF  
LEFT  
REW  
Next  
Prev  
Title  
Remote  
Data  
Erase  
MENU  
CHAPTER CHAPTER  
Title  
Finalization  
A
B
Standby  
On  
Standby  
Off  
Eject  
Fwd  
Field  
Step  
Rev  
Field  
Step  
Fwd Shtl  
Rev Shtl  
Select  
Preset  
Select  
Sense  
Date  
Clock  
Data  
Data  
Sense  
Sense  
C
D
Rec  
Status  
Sense  
Tc Data  
Sense  
CTL  
Extend  
Status  
Sense  
Data  
Sense  
E
F
Command  
Target  
Rec/Dub  
Request  
Mode  
: Non-synchronous  
Specifications  
• Pin layout  
Character length : 8 bits  
Parity check  
Start bit  
: Odd  
: 1  
1
Stop bit  
: 1  
Data rate  
: 9600 bps  
• Bit configuration  
PIN No. Signal  
Operation  
Receive data  
Transmit data  
Direction of signal  
arit  
2
3
5
RxD  
TxD  
HDD/DVD i PC  
D
D
D
D
D
D
D6  
D
HDD/DVD h PC  
GND Signal grounding  
Starting bit  
St ing bi  
t
Memo:  
• When using the Serial Command Connector, the cable to be used should be a RS-232C interface cable (straight type, 3 m or  
shorter).  
• When using RS-232C, set “QUICK STARTUP” in the settings menu to “ON”.  
• During command transmission, a minimum interval of About 50 milliseconds is required between each command.  
• During command transmission, do not send the next command until the ACK (refer to "System Commands" (A page 90) ) or  
response (refer to "Response Commands" (A page 90) ) for each command is received.  
• The recommended maximum waiting time for the ACK or response for each command is as follows.  
ACK  
: About 50 milliseconds  
Response : About 5 seconds  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Command  
o
Operation Commands  
Commands for operating functions such as PLAY and REC on the BLU-RAY DISC & HDD RECORDER  
A0  
A1  
A3  
AB  
Power On  
Command  
Description  
Plays the selected deck.  
Power Off  
3A  
3F  
Eject: Opens/Closes tray. (BD Deck only)  
Stops the selected deck. Resume will be  
cleared when this is pressed while in the Stop  
mode. Rec Request will be cleared.  
FF: Functions only during playback. Activates  
forward search.  
4F  
56  
80  
Switches the selected deck to the Still mode.  
Clear: Clears the Error status.  
AC  
AD  
REW: Functions only during playback.  
Activates reverse search.  
Functions as a key for advancing (FWD) a  
frame. When this command is received during  
still mode, the unit advances the still picture  
by one frame (or field) in the FWD direction.  
Searches the specified chapter and starts  
playback from the beginning.  
81  
Searches the specified title under "ORIGINAL"  
or in the "PLAY LIST" by its number and starts  
playback from the beginning.  
AE  
B5  
Functions as a key for reversing (REV) a  
frame. When this command is received during  
still mode, the unit reverses the still picture by  
one frame (or field) in the REV direction.  
8E  
8F  
90  
91  
92  
93  
For setting the date.  
For setting the time.  
Fwd Shtl: Functions only during playback.  
Activates forward search.  
B5 h 30: STILL  
B5 h 31: FWD SLOW at a slow speed.  
B5 h 33: FWD SLOW at a fast speed.  
B5 h 35: 1x  
B5 h 36: FWD SEARCH at a fast speed.  
B5 h 37: FWD SEARCH at a faster speed.  
B5 h 38: FWD SEARCH at the fastest speed.  
Finalizes the disc. (BD Deck)  
Cancels disc finalization. (BD Deck)  
For erasing rewritable discs.  
Displays/Closes the top menu of a disc. (BD  
Deck)  
94  
95  
Displays/Closes the disc menu. (BD Deck)  
Advances to the next chapter. Functions like  
B6  
B8  
Rev Shtl: Functions only during playback.  
Activates reverse search.  
B6 h 30: STILL  
B6 h 31: REV SLOW at a slow speed.  
B6 h 33: REV SLOW at a fast speed.  
B6 h 36: REV SEARCH at a fast speed.  
B6 h 37: REV SEARCH at a faster speed.  
B6 h 38: REV SEARCH at the fastest speed.  
the  
button on the remote control.  
T
96  
97  
Returns to the previous chapter. Functions  
like the button on the remote control.  
S
Displays/Closes the Main Menu, Editing,  
Library Database Navigation or Dubbing  
screen.  
97 h 30: Closes the screen.  
For setting the input/output, recording  
mode, audio language selection and subtitle  
selection.  
97 h 31: Displays the Main Menu screen.  
97 h 32: Displays the Library Database  
Navigation screen.  
97 h 35: Displays the Editing screen.  
97 h 37: Displays the Dubbing screen.  
CA  
F0  
Rec: Starts recording at the selected deck  
when a Rec Request is received.  
98  
99  
9A  
9B  
9C  
9D  
Functions as a confirmation key.  
Functions as an up key.  
Command Target:  
F0 h 34: For selecting HDD deck.  
F0 h 38: For selecting BD deck.  
F0 h 3C: For selecting SD deck.  
Functions as a down key.  
Functions as a right key.  
FA  
Rec Request: For issuing approval for  
recording. This can be cleared using STOP.  
Functions as a left key.  
Advances to the next title. Functions like the  
button on the remote control.  
T
9E  
9F  
Returns to the previous title. Functions like the  
button on the remote control.  
S
Issues the same codes as the wired remote  
control via RS-232C.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
80-8F  
80 : Chapter Search  
1st Byte  
2nd Byte  
3rd Byte  
Ones  
3*  
Chapter Search  
Hundreds Tens  
ASCII codes (30 - 39) 3*  
E.g. (012) 30  
3*  
31  
32  
E.g. : When searching the 12th chapter.  
81 : Title Search under "ORIGINAL"  
1st Byte  
2nd Byte  
3rd Byte  
4th Byte  
Ones  
3*  
Title Search (ORIGINAL) 30  
Hundreds Tens  
ASCII codes (30 - 39)  
E.g. (345)  
30  
30  
3*  
3*  
33  
34  
35  
E.g. : When searching the 345th title, as indicated by the title number on the top right corner of the index, under "ORIGINAL".  
81 : Title Search in "PLAY LIST"  
1st Byte  
Title Search (PLAY LIST) 38  
2nd Byte  
3rd Byte  
4th Byte  
Ones  
3*  
Hundreds Tens  
ASCII codes (30 - 39)  
E.g. (028)  
38  
38  
3*  
3*  
30  
32  
38  
E.g. : When searching the 28th play list, as indicated by the play list number on the top right corner of the index, in the "PLAY  
LIST".  
8E : Date Preset  
1st Byte  
2nd Byte  
3rd Byte  
4th Byte  
5th Byte  
6th Byte  
Date Preset  
Mth (Tens) Mth (Ones) Day (Tens) Day  
Yr (Tens)  
Yr (Ones)  
(Ones)  
3*  
34  
ASCII code (30 - 39)  
E.g. (09.14.2009)  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
30  
39  
31  
30  
39  
E.g. : When setting the date to September 14 2009.  
8F : Clock Preset  
1st Byte  
Hr (Tens)  
3*  
2nd Byte  
Hr (Ones)  
3*  
3rd Byte  
4th Byte  
5th Byte  
6th Byte  
Clock Preset  
Min (Tens) Min (Ones) Sec (Tens) Sec (Ones)  
ASCII code (30 - 39)  
E.g. (12:34:56)  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
E.g. : When setting the time to 12 hrs 34 min and 56 sec.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
9F  
9F : Remote Data  
The remote control codes for controlling the wired remote controller via RS-232C is as shown in the following table. The codes  
apply to all three HDD, BD and SD deck unless otherwise stated.  
Code  
01  
Items  
INPUT SELECT  
STOP  
Remarks  
80  
CUSOR 0°  
Moves the arrow in the  
index list to the right. ( )  
I
81  
82  
MENU  
BD/DVD Deck only  
03  
CUSOR 90°  
Moves the arrow in the  
06  
F.F/SPEED+  
REW/SPEED-  
POWER ON/OFF  
PLAY  
index list to the up. ( )  
J
07  
84  
86  
CUSOR 180°  
CUSOR 270°  
Moves the arrow in the  
index list to the left. ( )  
H
0B  
0C  
0D  
14  
Moves the arrow in the  
index list to the down.  
( )  
K
PAUSE/STILL  
FWD SKIP  
REV SKIP  
87  
8E  
8F  
90  
OPEN/CLOSE  
PROGRESSIVE  
TOP MENU  
MARK  
BD/DVD Deck only  
HDD/BD Deck only  
DVD Deck only  
15  
17  
AUDIO  
1A  
1D  
Power Off  
HDD/DVD Deck only  
Power On  
Use with “QUICK  
STARTUP” set to “ON”.  
Refer to “QUICK  
STARTUP” (A page  
76) .  
96  
CM SKIP  
AF  
B0  
B1  
B2  
B3  
B4  
B5  
B6  
B7  
B8  
B9  
BA  
BB  
BC  
BD  
BE  
BF  
C0  
REV FRAME  
-SLOW D  
SHUTTLE-C  
SHUTTLE-B  
SHUTTLE-A  
SHUTTLE-2  
SHUTTLE-1  
-SLOW B  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
2A  
2B  
2C  
31  
TEN KEY 1  
TEN KEY 2  
TEN KEY 3  
TEN KEY 4  
TEN KEY 5  
TEN KEY 6  
TEN KEY 7  
TEN KEY 8  
TEN KEY 9  
KEY Z  
-SLOW C  
+SLOW C  
+SLOW B  
SHUTTLE +1  
SHUTTLE +2  
SHUTTLE +A  
SHUTTLE +B  
SHUTTLE +C  
+SLOW D  
TEN KEY 0  
KEY #  
REC MODE (XP/SP/LP/  
EP…)  
32  
34  
37  
3C  
3E  
44  
48  
BD/DVD DECK  
DUBBING  
ANGLE/LIVE CHECK  
ANGLE (BD/DVD Deck  
only)  
LIVE CHECK (HDD/BD  
Deck only)  
SET UP  
OK/ENTER  
C4  
SUBTITLE DVD Deck  
only  
ON SCREEN  
HDD DECK  
CC REC  
D4 RETURN  
MEDIA MANAGEMENT  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
D5  
D7  
D9  
COLOR KEY BLUE  
COLOR KEY RED  
JOG-1/6  
E0  
E1  
E2  
NAVIGATION  
L1 Y/C INPUT SELECT  
HDD Deck only  
HDD Deck only  
L1 COMPOSITE INPUT  
SELECT  
DA JOG +1/6  
DB JOG +1  
E3  
E4  
E5  
PLAYBACK SETTING  
DELETE  
DC INSTANT REPLAY  
DD EDIT  
INFORMATION  
CORRECT  
DE  
DF  
COLOR KEY GREEN  
COLOR KEY YELLOW  
ED  
F2  
FWD FRAME  
MODE LOCK  
B8  
B8 : Input/Output Selection  
1st Byte 2nd Byte  
External input selection L-1 VIDEO  
30  
31  
39  
34  
External input selection L-1 S-VIDEO 30  
External input selection DV  
30  
B8 : Recording Mode Selection  
1st Byte  
XP 34  
2nd Byte  
30  
SP 34  
LP 34  
EP 34  
DR 34  
AF 34  
AN 34  
AL 34  
AE 34  
31  
32  
33  
3A  
3B  
3C  
3D  
3E  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Subtitle Selection  
B8 : Subtitle Selection  
1st  
2nd  
1st  
2nd  
1st  
2nd  
1st  
2nd  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
OFF  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
10  
11  
EL  
EO  
ET  
EU  
FA  
FJ  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
3A  
3B  
3C  
3D  
3E  
3F  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
47  
4B  
4C  
4D  
4E  
4F  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
LO  
LT  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
56  
57  
58  
59  
5A  
5B  
5C  
5D  
5E  
5F  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
6A  
6B  
6C  
6D  
6E  
6F  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
76  
77  
SL  
SM  
SN  
SO  
SQ  
SR  
SS  
ST  
SU  
SW  
TA  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
3C  
78  
79  
7A  
7B  
7C  
7D  
7E  
7F  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
8A  
8B  
8C  
8D  
8E  
8F  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
JAPANESE  
ENGLISH  
GERMAN  
FRENCH  
ITALIAN  
SPANISH  
DUTCH  
SWEDISH  
NORWEGIAN  
FINNISH  
DANISH  
AA  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
1A  
1B  
1C  
1D  
1E  
1F  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
2A  
2B  
2C  
2D  
2E  
2F  
30  
LV  
MG  
MI  
MK  
ML  
MN  
MO  
MR  
MS  
MT  
MY  
NA  
NE  
OC  
OM  
OR  
PA  
FO  
FY  
GA  
GD  
GL  
GN  
GU  
HA  
HI  
TE  
TG  
TH  
TI  
AB  
AF  
AM  
HR  
HU  
HY  
IA  
TK  
TL  
AR  
AS  
TN  
TO  
TR  
TS  
TT  
TW  
UK  
UR  
UZ  
V
AY  
AZ  
IE  
PL  
BA  
IK  
PS  
PT  
BE  
IS  
BG  
KA  
KK  
KL  
KM  
KN  
KO  
KS  
KU  
KY  
LA  
LN  
QU  
RM  
RN  
RO  
RU  
RW  
SA  
SD  
SG  
SI  
BH  
BI  
BN  
BO  
BR  
VO  
WO  
XH  
YO  
ZH  
ZU  
CA  
CO  
CS  
CY  
DZ  
SK  
"Language Code List" (A page 94)  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Audio Language Selection  
B8 : Audio Language Selection  
1st  
2nd  
1st  
2nd  
1st  
2nd  
1st  
2nd  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
JAPANESE  
ENGLISH  
GERMAN  
FRENCH  
ITALIAN  
SPANISH  
DUTCH  
SWEDISH  
NORWEGIAN  
FINNISH  
DANISH  
AA  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
1A  
1B  
1C  
1D  
1E  
1F  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
2A  
2B  
2C  
2D  
2E  
2F  
30  
31  
EO  
ET  
EU  
FA  
FJ  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
3A  
3B  
3C  
3D  
3E  
3F  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
47  
4B  
4C  
4D  
4E  
4F  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
LT  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
57  
58  
59  
5A  
5B  
5C  
5D  
5E  
5F  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
6A  
6B  
6C  
6D  
6E  
6F  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
76  
77  
78  
SM  
SN  
SO  
SQ  
SR  
SS  
ST  
SU  
SW  
TA  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
39  
79  
7A  
7B  
7C  
7D  
7E  
7F  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
8A  
8B  
8C  
8D  
8E  
8F  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
LV  
MG  
MI  
MK  
ML  
MN  
MO  
MR  
MS  
MT  
MY  
NA  
NE  
OC  
OM  
OR  
PA  
FO  
FY  
GA  
GD  
GL  
GN  
GU  
HA  
HI  
TE  
TG  
TH  
TI  
AB  
AF  
AM  
HR  
HU  
HY  
IA  
TK  
TL  
AR  
AS  
TN  
TO  
TR  
TS  
TT  
AY  
AZ  
IE  
PL  
BA  
IK  
PS  
PT  
QU  
RM  
RN  
RO  
RU  
RW  
SA  
SD  
SG  
SI  
BE  
IS  
BG  
KA  
KK  
KL  
KM  
KN  
KO  
KS  
KU  
KY  
LA  
LN  
LO  
TW  
UK  
UR  
UZ  
VI  
BH  
BI  
BN  
BO  
BR  
VO  
WO  
XH  
YO  
ZH  
ZU  
CA  
CO  
CS  
CY  
DZ  
SK  
SL  
EL  
"Language Code List" (A page 94)  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Response Commands  
Commands relating to RS-232C control system.  
Command  
Description  
01  
02  
Complete: Issued by the external recorder upon completing all specified operations by commands.  
Error: Issued by the external recorder when receiving invalid commands in the context. In such cases,  
commands that are sent will not be accepted. However, a return command will be issued but only to the Status  
Sense. To clear the Error status, perform command 56 (Clear).  
05  
Not Target: Issued by the external recorder when specified operations by commands cannot be completed  
properly.  
0A  
0B  
03  
ACK: A return command issued when a defined command is received.  
NAK: A return command issued when an undefined or possibly nonexistent command is received.  
Cassette Out: Issued upon completing the operation of opening and closing the tray when the HDD/DVD deck  
is selected.  
System Commands  
Commands for acquiring information such as deck status.  
Command  
Description  
60  
61  
B9  
Chapter Sense: For acquiring the current chapter number. (*)  
Title/Track Sense: For acquiring the current title number under "ORIGINAL" or in the "PLAY LIST". (*)  
Select Sense: For acquiring the status of the inputs, outputs, recording mode, audio language selection and  
subtitle selection. (*)  
BE  
BF  
D7  
D8  
Date Sense: For acquiring the currently configured year, month and day. (*)  
Time Sense: For acquiring the currently configured hour, minute and second. (*)  
Status Sense: For acquiring the deck information. (*)  
TC Data Sense: For acquiring the total remaining time in the current recording mode when there is a media in  
the selected deck. (*)  
D9  
DD  
FB  
CTL Data Sense: For acquiring the lapse counter when there is a media in the selected deck. (*)  
Extend Status Sense: Returns data from the unit. (*)  
VTR Ind: A command for checking whether the connected device is the external recorder.  
(*) : See A pages 90-93 for data format.  
Sense  
• Chapter Sense  
1st Byte  
2nd Byte  
3rd Byte  
Ones  
3*  
Chapter Sense Hundreds Tens  
60  
3*  
3*  
E.g. (012)  
30  
31  
32  
E.g. : When the current chapter is the 12th chapter.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
• Title/Track Sense under "ORIGINAL"  
1st Byte  
Title/Track Sense (ORIGINAL) 30  
2nd Byte  
3rd Byte  
4th Byte  
Ones  
3*  
Hundreds Tens  
61  
30  
30  
3*  
3*  
E.g. (345)  
33  
34  
35  
E.g. : When the current title under "ORIGINAL" is the 345th title.  
• Title/Track Sense in "PLAY LIST"  
1st Byte  
Title/Track Sense (PLAY LIST) 38  
2nd Byte  
3rd Byte  
4th Byte  
Ones  
3*  
Hundreds Tens  
61  
38  
38  
3*  
3*  
E.g. (028)  
30  
32  
38  
E.g. : When the current title under "PLAY LIST" is the 28th title.  
• Select Sense  
1st Byte  
2nd Byte  
3rd Byte  
4th Byte  
5th Byte  
Select Sense  
B9  
External input  
selection  
Output selection Recording mode Audio language  
Subtitle selection  
selection  
selection  
3*  
3*  
**  
**  
**  
E.g. (3930311213) 39  
30  
31  
12  
13  
E.g. : When the selection status of the video deck is as follows:  
External input selection h L-1 S-VIDEO  
Output selection h Common output (Frame is fixed at 0.)  
Recording mode selection h SP  
Audio language selection h ENGLISH  
Subtitle selection h GERMAN  
For response data for B9, see data format for “B8 (Select Preset)” (A page 87-89).  
When the current status cannot be acquired, the value is fixed as "-" (0x2D).  
• Date Data Sense  
For acquiring the currently configured year, month and day in ASCII codes.  
1st Byte  
2nd Byte  
3rd Byte  
4th Byte  
5th Byte  
6th Byte  
Date Sense  
Mth (Tens) Mth (Ones) Day (Tens) Day  
Yr (Tens)  
Yr (Ones)  
(Ones)  
3*  
34  
BE  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
E.g. (09.14.2009)  
30  
39  
31  
30  
39  
When the current date is not set, the value is fixed as "-" (0x2D).  
• Time Data Sense  
For acquiring the currently configured hour, minute and second in ASCII codes.  
1st Byte  
Hr (Tens)  
3*  
2nd Byte  
Hr (Ones)  
3*  
3rd Byte  
4th Byte  
5th Byte  
6th Byte  
Time Sense  
BF  
Min (Tens) Min (Ones) Sec (Tens) Sec (Ones)  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
E.g. (12:34:56)  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
When the current time is not set, the value is fixed as "-" (0x2D).  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
• Status Data Sense  
For acquiring the remaining time in the current recording mode in hours, minutes and seconds for HDD/DVD.  
D7  
1byte  
1byte  
1byte  
2byte  
3byte  
4byte  
5byte  
STATUS  
SENSE  
HDD  
BD  
SD  
HDD/BD/SD  
Video EE  
HDD/BD/SD HDD/BD/SD HDD/BD/SD  
bit7  
1 (Fixed)  
1 (Fixed)  
1 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
During PLAY During PAUSE (Set  
to 1 simultaneously  
with "During PLAY"  
in STILL mode.)  
bit6  
bit5  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
1 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
1 (Fixed)  
1 (Fixed)  
Audio EE  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
During Reverse  
Shuttle Search  
(Excluding STILL)  
bit4  
bit3  
Record  
Forbidden  
Record  
Forbidden  
1 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
During STOP During Forward  
Shuttle Search  
(Excluding STILL)  
Disc Not  
Inserted  
Disc Not  
Inserted  
Disc Not  
Inserted  
Occurrence of 0 (Fixed)  
abnormality in  
VTR  
During  
Refer to the  
SEARCH SPEED  
table.  
STANDBY  
(Unit Power  
Off)  
bit2  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
During  
Repeat  
Playback  
(Including  
PAUSE)  
0 (Fixed)  
Refer to the  
SEARCH SPEED  
table.  
bit1  
bit0  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
During REC  
0 (Fixed)  
Refer to the  
SEARCH SPEED  
table.  
RS-232C  
RS-232C  
RS-232C  
0 (Fixed)  
Refer to the  
SEARCH SPEED  
table.  
command  
error status.  
Clear using  
56 (Clear).  
command  
error status.  
Clear using  
56 (Clear).  
command  
error status.  
Clear using  
56 (Clear).  
• TC Data Sense  
1st Byte  
2nd Byte  
3rd Byte  
4th Byte  
5th Byte  
6th Byte  
7th Byte  
8th Byte  
TC Data Sense Hr (Tens) Hr (Ones) Min (Tens) Min (Ones) Sec (Tens) Sec (Ones) Frame (Tens) Frame (Ones)  
D8  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
E.g. (01:23:45)  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
30  
30  
E.g. : When remaining time is 1 hr 23 min 45 sec.  
Frame is fixed as 0.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
• SEARCH SPEED  
bit3  
bit2  
bit1  
bit0  
STILL  
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
x1  
SEARCH1  
SEARCH2  
SEARCH3  
SEARCH4  
SEARCH5  
• CTL Data Sense  
For acquiring lapse counter of selected deck in hours, minutes and seconds.  
1st Byte 2nd Byte 3rd Byte 4th Byte 5th Byte  
CTL Data Sense Hr (Tens) Hr (Ones) Min (Tens) Min (Ones) Sec (Tens) Sec (Ones) Frame (Tens) Frame (Ones)  
6th Byte  
7th Byte  
8th Byte  
D9  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
3*  
E.g. (01:23:45)  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
30  
30  
E.g. : When time lapse counter is 1 hr 23 min 45 sec.  
Frame is fixed as 0.  
• Extend Status Sense  
1byte  
2byte  
3byte  
4byte  
HDD/BD/SD HDD/BD/SD  
HDD/BD/SD  
1 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
HDD/BD/SD  
1 (Fixed)  
1 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
bit7 1 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
1 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
bit6 0 (Fixed)  
bit5 0 (Fixed)  
bit4 0 (Fixed)  
bit3 0 (Fixed)  
Refer to the DISC TYPE table below. 0 (Fixed)  
During dubbing (Including  
PAUSE)  
bit2 0 (Fixed)  
bit1 0 (Fixed)  
bit0 1 (Fixed)  
Refer to the DISC TYPE table below. 0 (Fixed)  
Refer to the DISC TYPE table below. 0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
0 (Fixed)  
Refer to the DISC TYPE table below. During dubbing (Including  
PAUSE)  
• DISC TYPE  
bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0  
bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0  
DVD  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
CD  
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
DVD-RAM  
DVD-R  
BD-ROM  
BD-R  
DVD-RW  
DVD+R  
DVD+RW  
BD-RE  
No disc  
Unknown  
When SD deck is selected, the values are fixed as bit3:0, bit2:0, bit1:1 and bit0:0.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Language Code List  
Code  
AA  
AB  
AF  
Language  
Code  
HI  
Language  
Code  
OS  
PA  
Language  
Afar  
Hindi  
Ossetian  
Panjabi  
Persian  
Pali  
Abkhazian  
Afrikaans  
Akan  
HO  
HU  
IG  
Hiri Motu  
Hungarian  
Igbo  
FA  
AK  
SQ  
AM  
AR  
AN  
HY  
AS  
PI  
Albanian  
Amharic  
Arabic  
IS  
Icelandic  
Ido  
PL  
Polish  
IO  
PT  
Portuguese  
Pashto  
II  
Sichuan Yi  
Inuktitut  
Interlingue  
PS  
QU  
RM  
RO  
Aragonese  
Armenian  
Assamese  
IU  
Quechua  
IE  
Rhaeto-Romance  
Romanian  
IA  
Interlingua (International  
Auxiliary language Association)  
AV  
AE  
AY  
AZ  
BA  
BM  
EU  
BE  
BN  
BH  
BI  
Avar  
ID  
IK  
Indonesian  
Inupiak  
RN  
RU  
SG  
SA  
SR  
HR  
SI  
Kirundi  
Avestan  
Aymara  
Russian  
Sango  
IT  
Italian  
Azerbaijani  
Bashkir  
JV  
JA  
KL  
KN  
KS  
KR  
KK  
KM  
KI  
Javanese  
Japanese  
Kalaallisut  
Kannada  
Kashmiri  
Kanuri  
Sanskrit  
Serbia  
Bambara  
Basque  
Croatian  
Sinhala  
Slovak  
Belarusian  
Bengali  
SK  
SL  
Slovenian  
Northern Sami  
Samoan  
Shona  
Bihari  
Kazakh  
SE  
SM  
SN  
SD  
SO  
ST  
ES  
SC  
SS  
SU  
SW  
SV  
TY  
TA  
Bislama  
Khmer  
BS  
BR  
BG  
MY  
CA  
CH  
CE  
ZH  
CU  
CV  
KW  
CO  
CR  
CS  
DA  
Bosnian  
Breton  
Kikuyu  
RW  
KY  
KV  
KG  
KO  
KJ  
KU  
LO  
LA  
LV  
LI  
Kinyarwanda  
Kirghiz  
Sindhi  
Bulgarian  
Burmese  
Catalan, Valencian  
Chamorro  
Chechen  
Chinese  
Church Slavic  
Chuvash  
Cornish  
Somali  
Komi  
Southern Sotho  
Spanish  
Sardinian  
Swati  
Kongo  
Korean  
Kwanyama  
Kurukh  
Sundanese  
Swahili  
Lao  
Latin  
Swedish  
Tahitian  
Tamil  
Latvian  
Corsican  
Cree  
Limburgish  
Lingala  
LN  
LT  
TT  
Tatar  
Czech  
Lithuanian  
Luxembourgish  
TE  
TG  
Telugu  
Danish  
LB  
Tajik  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
DV  
NL  
DZ  
EN  
EO  
ET  
EE  
FO  
FJ  
Divehi  
LU  
LG  
MK  
MH  
ML  
MI  
Luba-Katanga  
Ganda  
TL  
TH  
BO  
TI  
Tagalog  
Thai  
Dutch  
Dzongkha  
English  
Esperanto  
Estonian  
Ewe  
Macedonian  
Marshallese  
Malayalam  
Māori  
Tibetan  
Tigrinya  
Tongan  
Tswana  
Tsonga  
Turkmen  
Turkish  
Twi  
TO  
TN  
TS  
TK  
TR  
TW  
UG  
UK  
UR  
UZ  
VE  
VI  
MR  
MS  
MG  
MT  
MO  
MN  
NA  
NV  
NR  
ND  
NG  
NE  
NN  
NB  
NO  
NY  
OC  
OJ  
Marathi  
Faroese  
Fijian  
Malay  
Malagasy  
Maltese  
FI  
Finnish  
French  
FR  
FY  
FF  
KA  
DE  
GD  
GA  
GL  
GV  
EL  
GN  
GU  
HT  
HA  
HE  
HZ  
Moldavian  
Mongolian  
Nauruan  
Uighur  
Ukrainian  
Urdu  
Western Frisian  
Fulah  
Georgian  
German  
Scottish Gaelic  
Irish  
Navajo  
Uzbek  
South Ndebele  
North Ndebele  
Ndonga  
Venda  
Vietnamese  
Volapük  
Welsh  
VO  
CY  
WA  
WO  
XH  
YI  
Galician  
Manx  
Nepali  
Norwegian Nynorsk  
Norwegian Bokmål  
Norwegian  
Chichewa  
Occitan  
Walloon  
Wolof  
Greek  
Guaraní  
Gujarati  
Haitian  
Xhosa  
Yiddish  
Yoruba  
Zhuang  
Zulu  
YO  
ZA  
ZU  
Hausa  
Ojibwa  
Hebrew  
Herero  
OR  
OM  
Oriya  
Oromo  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Country Code List  
Code  
AD  
AE  
AF  
Country Name  
Code  
GM  
GN  
Country Name  
Code  
NU  
NZ  
Country Name  
Andorra  
Gambia  
Niue  
United Arab Emirates  
Afghanistan  
Guinea  
New Zealand  
Oman  
GP  
Guadeloupe  
OM  
PA  
AG  
AI  
Antigua and Barbuda  
Anguilla  
GQ  
GR  
Equatorial Guinea  
Greece  
Panama  
Peru  
PE  
AL  
Albania  
GS  
South Georgia and South Sandwich  
Islands  
PF  
Polynesia  
AM  
AN  
AO  
AQ  
AR  
AS  
AT  
Armenia  
GT  
GU  
GW  
GY  
HK  
HM  
HN  
HR  
HT  
HU  
ID  
Guatemala  
PG  
PH  
PK  
PL  
Papua New Guinea  
Philippines  
Netherlands Antilles  
Angola  
Guam  
Guinea-Bissau  
Pakistan  
Antarctica  
Argentina  
American Samoa  
Austria  
Guyana  
Poland  
Hong Kong  
PM  
PN  
PR  
PT  
PW  
PY  
QA  
RE  
RO  
RU  
RW  
SA  
SB  
SC  
SD  
SE  
SG  
SH  
SI  
Saint Pierre and Miquelon  
Pitcairn Islands  
Puerto Rico  
Portugal  
Heard and McDonald Islands  
Honduras  
AU  
AW  
AZ  
BA  
BB  
BD  
BE  
BF  
BG  
BH  
BI  
Australia  
Croatia  
Aruba  
Haiti  
Palau  
Azerbaijan  
Bosnia and Herzegovina  
Barbados  
Bangladesh  
Belgium  
Hungary  
Paraguay  
Indonesia  
Qatar  
IE  
Ireland  
Reunon Island  
Romania  
IL  
Israel  
IN  
India  
Russian Federation  
Rwanda  
Burkina Faso  
Bulgaria  
IO  
British Indian Ocean Territory  
IQ  
Iraq  
Saudi Arabia  
Solomon Islands  
Seychelles  
Bahrain  
IR  
Iran  
Burundi  
IS  
Iceland  
BJ  
Benin  
IT  
Italy  
Sudan  
BM  
BN  
BO  
BR  
BS  
BT  
BV  
BW  
BY  
BZ  
Bermuda  
Brunei  
JM  
JO  
JP  
KE  
KG  
KH  
KI  
Jamaica  
Jordan  
Sweden  
Singapore  
Bolivia  
Japan  
Saint Helena  
Slovenia  
Brazil  
Kenya  
Bahamas  
Bhutan  
Kyrgyzstan  
Cambodia  
Kiribati  
SJ  
Svalbard and Jan Mayen Islands  
Slovakia  
SK  
SL  
Bouvet Island  
Botswana  
Belarus  
Sierra Leone  
San Marino  
Senegal  
KM  
KN  
KP  
Comoros  
Saint Kitts and Nevis  
SM  
SN  
SO  
Belize  
Korea, Democratic People's Republic  
of  
Somalia  
CA  
CC  
CF  
CG  
CH  
CI  
Canada  
KR  
KW  
KY  
KZ  
LA  
LB  
Korea, Republic of  
Kuwait  
SR  
ST  
SV  
SY  
SZ  
TC  
Suriname  
Cocos Islands  
Central African Republic  
Congo, Republic of  
Switzerland  
Sao Tome and Principe  
El Salvador  
Cayman Islands  
Kazakhstan  
Laos  
Syria  
Swaziland  
Cote d'Ivoire  
Lebanon  
Turks and Caicos Islands  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
CK  
CL  
CM  
CN  
CO  
CR  
CU  
CV  
CX  
CY  
CZ  
DE  
DJ  
Cook Islands  
Chile  
LC  
Saint Lucia  
Liechtenstein  
Sri Lanka  
Liberia  
TD  
TF  
Chad  
LI  
French Southern Territories  
Togo  
Cameroon  
LK  
TG  
TH  
TJ  
China  
LR  
Thailand  
Colombia  
LS  
Lesotho  
Tajikistan  
Costa Rica  
Cuba  
LT  
Lithuania  
Luxembourg  
Latvia  
TK  
TM  
TN  
TO  
TP  
TR  
TT  
Tokelau  
LU  
Turkmenistan  
Tunisia  
Cape Verde  
Christmas Island  
Cyprus  
LV  
LY  
Libya  
Tonga  
MA  
MC  
MD  
MG  
MH  
ML  
MM  
MN  
MO  
MP  
MQ  
MR  
MS  
MT  
MU  
MV  
MW  
MX  
MY  
MZ  
NA  
NC  
NE  
Morocco  
East Timor  
Czech Republic  
Germany  
Monaco  
Turkey  
Moldova  
Trinidad and Tobago  
Tuvalu  
Djibouti  
Madagascar  
Marshall Islands  
Mali  
TV  
TW  
TZ  
DK  
DM  
DO  
DZ  
EC  
EE  
EG  
EH  
ER  
ES  
ET  
FI  
Denmark  
Taiwan  
Dominica, Commonwealth of  
Dominican Republic  
Algeria  
Tanzania  
Myanmar  
Mongolia  
Macau  
UA  
UG  
UM  
US  
UY  
UZ  
VA  
VC  
VE  
VG  
VI  
Ukraine  
Uganda  
Ecuador  
Minor Outlying Islands  
United States  
Uruguay  
Estonia  
Northern Mariana Islands  
Martinique  
Mauritania  
Montserrat  
Malta  
Egypt  
Western Sahara  
Eritrea  
Uzbekistan  
Vatican  
Spain  
Saint Vincent and the Grenadine  
Venezuela  
Ethiopia  
Mauritius  
Maldives  
Finland  
British Virgin Islands  
Virgin Islands of the United States  
Vietnam  
FJ  
Fiji  
Malawi  
FK  
FM  
FO  
FR  
FX  
GA  
GB  
Falkland Islands (Malvinas)  
Micronesia (Federated States of)  
Faroe Islands  
France  
Mexico  
VN  
VU  
WF  
WS  
YE  
YT  
YU  
Malaysia  
Vanuatu  
Mozambique  
Namibia  
Wallis and Futuna  
Samoa  
France, Metropolitan  
Gabon  
New Caledonia  
Niger  
Yemen  
Mayotte  
United Kingdom of Great Britain and NF  
Northern Ireland  
Norfolk Island  
Yugoslavia  
GD  
GE  
GF  
GH  
GI  
Grenada  
Georgia  
NG  
NI  
Nigeria  
ZA  
ZM  
ZR  
ZW  
South Africa  
Zambia  
Nicaragua  
Netherlands  
Norway  
Nepal  
French Guiana  
Ghana  
NL  
NO  
NP  
NR  
Zaire  
Zimbabwe  
Gibraltar  
GL  
Greenland  
Nauru  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Using the HDMI Consumer  
Electronics Control (HDMI  
CEC)  
Creating a Seamless BD  
When titles are imported into the HDD in the HD quality from  
a video camera, or when edited titles (e.g., after applying  
scene delete) are dubbed to a disc, seamless playback may  
not be possible at the joints of scenes. In this case, perform  
dubbing after executing “SEAMLESS” under the “MODE  
CHANGE” setting menu.  
HDMI Consumer Electronics Control  
• By using a HDMI cable to connect this unit with a TV that  
supports the HDMI CEC standard, this unit and the TV can  
be linked and operated together.  
• HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) is an industrial  
standard that allows HDMI devices to be linked and  
operated among each other by connecting them with a  
HDMI cable.  
For details, refer to "Mode conversion" (A page 73) .  
Creating a seamless BD that uses "MODE  
CONVERSION" (seamless conversion,  
recording mode conversion)  
o
Procedures to create a seamless BDMV  
File to import  
If you do not want to  
perform scene delete/  
chapter delete  
If you want to perform  
scene delete/chapter  
delete  
HDMI Consumer Electronics Control  
operations  
• Perform the following operations when this unit is turned on,  
and the TV will switch automatically to the HDMI input that  
this unit is connected to.  
AVCHD  
Recording mode  
conversion  
-
• Playback from HDD, BD/DVD or SD CARD  
• Press the [NAVIGATION] or [SETUP] button  
SD-VIDEO(HD)  
HDV  
Recording mode  
conversion after  
Recording mode  
conversion after  
seamless conversion  
seamless conversion  
• Turning off the power for the TV will also turn the power off  
for this unit automatically.  
o
If HDD, BD/DVD or SD CARD is being used for dubbing,  
the power will be turned off after dubbing finishes.  
Procedures to create a seamless BDAV  
File to import  
If you do not want to  
perform scene delete/  
chapter delete  
If you want to perform  
scene delete/chapter  
delete  
Using HDMI Consumer Electronics Control  
(activating the function)  
1 Connect this unit to a TV that is HDMI CEC  
AVCHD  
Conversion not required  
Seamless conversion  
-
SD-VIDEO(HD)  
HDV  
Seamless conversion  
compatible using a HDMI cable  
2 Change the setting of “HDMI-CEC” to “ON”.  
• Check the monitor (TV) setting if the HDMI CEC function  
does not work.  
Memo:  
• During dubbing to BDMV, the recording mode cannot be  
specified.  
Memo:  
• Do not perform recording mode conversion before seamless  
conversion. Otherwise, seamless conversion cannot be  
performed.  
• If scene delete or chapter delete is applied to a title, it  
cannot be dubbed to a BDMV disc without performing  
seamless conversion.  
• For titles that are imported into the HDD in the SD picture  
quality, you can create a seamless DVD by setting  
“SEAMLESS PLAYBACK” under the "Setting Menu List" to  
“ON”, followed by performing re-encode dubbing.  
• If you are not using the HDMI CEC function (deactivating),  
change the setting of “HDMI-CEC” to “OFF”.  
Note:  
• The HDMI CEC function cannot be used if a TV that is not  
compatible with HDMI CEC has been connected.  
• If a HDMI cable is not used for connecting, the HDMI CEC  
function will not be usable.  
Refer to “SEAMLESS PLAYBACK” (A page 77) .  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Symptom  
Action  
Reference  
Page  
Power does not turn on The "HELLO" message remains  
Press the [RESET] button on the front  
panel.  
If it does not start up, stop using this unit,  
unplug the plug from the power point, and  
bring it to the dealer or "Service Center".  
(A page 13)  
displayed, and the unit does not start  
up.  
"FAN LOCKED" is  
displayed on the display  
window of this unit  
The cooling fan motor is not working.  
The cooling fan motor is spoiled. Remove  
the power plug from the power point, and  
consult the dealer from which this product  
is purchased, or any nearby TASCAM  
Servicing Center.  
-
Power turns off  
automatically  
The “AUTO POWER (OFF)” setting is Change the “AUTO POWER (OFF)” setting (A page 75)  
set to “2 HOURS” or “6 HOURS”. of “SETUP” to “OFF”.  
The temperature of this unit has rose, Place this unit in an area with ventilation  
-
and operation has ceased for safety  
purposes.  
if possible, and wait approximately 30  
minutes for it to cool down.  
The power turns on  
automatically  
The “HDMI-CEC” setting is set to “ON”. Change the “HDMI-CEC” setting of  
“CONNECTION” to “OFF”.  
(A page 81)  
(A page 37)  
(A page 81)  
Input cannot be  
switched  
i.LINK connection is currently being  
established.  
Cancel importing, or wait until the  
connection ends.  
There are no video  
images on the monitor  
Monitor only supports RGB input.  
Set “HDMI --> DVI COLOR” in the setting  
menu to “RGB FIX”.  
"HDCP ERROR" is displayed.  
Use a monitor that supports HDCP.  
-
Video images may be distorted during This is not a malfunction. Change the  
reencoding/dubbing when the monitor “HDMI OUTPUT RESOLUTION” to a value  
(A page 80)  
(TV) is connected to this unit using  
a HDMI cable, or when the screen  
resolution is set to “1080p”.  
other than “1080p” (e.g., 1080i) if you find it  
annoying.  
Screen is distorted  
Video images may be distorted during This is not a malfunction. Change the  
reencoding/dubbing when the monitor “HDMI OUTPUT RESOLUTION” to a value  
(A page 24)  
(TV) is connected to this unit using  
a HDMI cable, or when the screen  
resolution is set to “1080p”.  
other than “1080p” (e.g., 1080i) if you find it  
annoying.  
There is no audio sound The “HDMI AUDIO OUTPUT” setting  
is set to “OFF”.  
Change the “HDMI AUDIO OUTPUT”  
setting of “CONNECTION” to “ON”.  
(A page 81)  
(A page 78)  
(A page 23)  
The amplifier does not support  
“BITSTREAM” output.  
Use an amplifier that supports bitstream  
output.  
Dubbing cannot be  
performed  
The title to be dubbed is copyright  
protected.  
Titles that are copyright-protected cannot  
be dubbed. Select a title that is not  
copyright-protected.  
A finalized disc has been inserted.  
The disc is not formatted.  
Insert a disc that has not been finalized.  
-
Format the disc.  
(A page 25)  
The SD card is write-protected.  
Remove the SD card and remove the write (A page 27)  
protect lock.  
High-speed dubbing  
cannot be performed for and “SOME TITLES CANNOT BE  
EP mode titles  
Dubbing cannot be performed  
Set “HIGH-SPEED DUBBING” in the  
settings menu to “4:3” before recording or  
importing in the EP mode.  
(A page 24)  
(A page 77)  
DUBBED” is displayed when trying  
to perform high-speed dubbing of a  
EP mode title to a DVD-VIDEO mode  
disc.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Problem  
Symptom  
Action  
Reference  
Page  
Data cannot be  
imported  
The title to be dubbed is copyright  
protected.  
Titles that are copyright-protected cannot  
be dubbed. Select a title that is not  
copyright-protected.  
(A page 23)  
The number of titles stored in the HDD Delete or combine the titles in the HDD  
(A page 62)  
has reached the maximum amount.  
to reduce the amount of titles to less than  
500.  
The remaining space on the HDD is  
running out.  
Delete the titles in the HDD to increase the (A page 62)  
remaining space.  
The title/group name  
cannot be changed  
Protection of the title/group name is  
turned on.  
Turn protection off for the title/group name. (A page 64)  
The remote control unit The battery of the remote control unit  
Change new batteries for the remote  
control.  
(A page 16)  
does not work  
has run out.  
The remote control code of this  
unit and the remote control unit are  
different from each other.  
Change the “REMOTE CONTROL CODE” (A page 16)  
for the remote control to the same number  
used by this unit.  
A "LOCKED" message appears on the Disable the "mode lock" setting.  
display window of the unit.  
(A page 82)  
(A page 82)  
-
The disc cannot be  
ejected  
A "LOCKED" message appears on the Disable the "tray lock" setting.  
display window of the unit.  
The “READING” message does not  
disappear from the unit's display  
window, and the disc tray does not  
Pressing the [ ] button at the front of  
the unit for five seconds or longer opens  
the disc tray. To close the disc tray after  
M
open when the [ ] button is pressed. removing the disc, press the [  
] button,  
M
A
and wait until the tray is closed and  
operation is turned off.  
(If the disc tray does not open after  
pressing the [ ] button for five seconds or  
M
longer, consult our authorized dealer.)  
The disc cannot be  
played  
A disc that cannot be played on this  
unit is inserted.  
Confirm that the disc is playable on this  
unit.  
(A page 10)  
The region code of the BD or DVD is  
different from that of this unit.  
Confirm that the region number is playable (A page 10)  
on this unit.  
An unfinalized DVD disc that is  
recorded using another device is  
inserted.  
Use that device to finalize the disc.  
-
-
Output is at 480i  
regardless of the  
component output  
resolution setting  
The component output setting may  
be changed to 480i after viewing at  
a setting of 1080/24p using a HDMI  
connection.  
Turn the power off, and turn it on again.  
The aspect ratios of  
the HDMI output and  
component output are  
different  
When two monitors are connected  
respectively to the HDMI output  
and component output terminals of  
this unit, the screen aspect ratio of  
the component output may not be  
appropriate if “VIDEO PRIORITY  
MODE” is set to “HDMI”.  
When two monitors are connected  
simultaneously, users are recommended  
to set “VIDEO PRIORITY MODE” to  
“COMPONENT”.  
(A page 80)  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Digital audio output  
Optical  
HDMI output  
Specifications  
: PCM, AAC, Dolby Digital and DTS  
o
General  
19-pin type A  
(Deep Color, x.v.Color, Ver1.3)  
USB terminal  
USB2.0  
Power requirement  
AC 120 V H, 60 Hz  
Power consumption  
Power on  
: 34 W  
: 3.0 W  
o
SD memory card  
Power off  
SD, SDHC  
Laser specification  
For CD  
o
HDD Deck  
Wavelength  
Output  
: 779 nm to 789 nm  
: No hazardous radiation is emitted  
with the safety protection.  
Capacity  
: 500 GB  
Recording compression system  
Video  
MPEG2 (VBR)  
H.264/AVC  
Audio  
For DVD  
Wavelength  
Output  
: 656 nm to 663 nm  
: No hazardous radiation is emitted  
with the safety protection.  
Dolby Digital (2 ch)  
Linear PCM (2ch, XP mode only)  
For BD  
Wavelength  
Output  
: 400 nm to 410 nm  
: No hazardous radiation is emitted  
with the safety protection.  
o
BD/DVD Deck  
Recording compression system  
Video  
MPEG2 (CBR/VBR)  
H.264/AVC  
Audio  
Dolby Digital (2 ch)  
Linear PCM (2ch, XP mode only)  
Region code  
Temperature  
Operating  
: 5 °C to 35 °C (41 °F to 95 °F)  
: -20 °C to 60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F)  
: Horizontal only  
Storage  
Operating position  
Dimensions (W x H x D) (with Rack mount Parts)  
: 483 mm x 88 mm x 351 mm  
(19-1/64" x 3-7/16" x 13-13/16")  
: 5.9 kg (13.0 lbs)  
Weight  
BD  
DVD  
: Region A  
: #1  
o
Input/Output  
WVideo input  
Video input  
Video output  
Audio input  
Audio output  
S-video input  
Y
: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 K (BNC)  
: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 K (BNC)  
: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 K (BNC)  
: Max 2 Vrm / 10 kK (pin jack)  
: 2 Vrms / 10 kK terminated (pin jack)  
o
ACCESSORIES  
Provided accessories  
• AC power cord (2 m)  
• Infrared remote control unit  
• "AA" battery x 2  
• FOOT x 4  
: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 K  
C
: 0.286 Vp-p, 75 K  
S-video output  
Y
C
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 K  
: 0.286 Vp-p, 75 K  
: 4-pin for HDV/DV IN  
: R3.5 mm Jack  
DV  
Remote Input  
Serial Command  
: D-SUB 9-PIN  
Component video output  
Y
: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 K  
: 0.7 Vp-p, 75 K  
CB/CR, PB/PR  
Memo:  
• Corresponding to copy protection  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
O
Index  
ON SCREEN .................................................................... 9, 79  
OPTICAL.................................................................. 14, 18, 78  
OSD LANGUAGE................................................................. 79  
A
AUDIO CABLE ......................................................... 14, 18, 17  
AUDIO LANGUAGE................................................. 56, 76, 89  
AUDIO/SUBTITLE SETTINGS............................................. 56  
P
PICTURE QUALITY ........................................... 23, 28, 40, 57  
PLAYBACK NAVIGATION........................................ 15, 43, 48  
PLAYBACK SETTINGS...................................... 16, 52, 56, 76  
PROGRESSIVE OUTPUT.................................................... 57  
B
BD (BD-R/BD-RE) .................................... 9, 10, 25, 39, 58, 93  
BD MIX SOUND ................................................................... 79  
BD VIDEO DATA .................................................................... 8  
BDAV.......................................................................... 9, 10, 24  
BDMV ......................................................................... 9, 10, 24  
BD-ROM................................................................... 10, 56, 93  
BD-VIDEO RATINGS ........................................................... 76  
BLUE BACK ......................................................................... 79  
R
RECORDING MODE.................. 13, 15, 23, 24, 28, 47, 50, 87  
REGION CODE.................................................................... 10  
REMOTE CONTROL.................................... 13, 14, 15, 16, 82  
REMOTE CONTROL CODE .......................................... 16, 75  
RESUME POINT ................................................ 51, 53, 54, 77  
RS-232C................................................................... 14, 19, 83  
C
S
CHANGE ANGLE................................................................. 56  
CHANGE AUDIO OUTPUT .................................................. 56  
CHANGE CHAPTER............................................................ 56  
CHAPTER EDIT ............................................................. 50, 67  
CHAPTER MARK............................................... 16, 51, 67, 68  
COMPONENT OUTPUT ...................................................... 81  
COMPONENT VIDEO CABLE ....................................... 14, 17  
CONNECTION ................................................... 17, 18, 19, 80  
COUNTRY CODE LIST.................................................. 76, 96  
SCREEN SAVER.................................................................. 79  
SEAMLESS PLAYBACK ...................................................... 77  
SETTING THE DATE/TIME.................................................. 20  
SUBTITLE LANGUAGE ................................................. 56, 76  
S-VIDEO............................................................. 14, 17, 18, 81  
T
TIME DISPLAY STYLE................................................... 22, 75  
U
D
USB .............................................................. 13, 18, 23, 29, 33  
DATE DISPLAY STYLE.................................................. 21, 75  
DETAIL SETTING................................................................. 57  
DIGITAL NOISE REDUCTION ............................................. 57  
DIMMER (POWER ON)........................................................ 75  
DISPLAY WINDOW............................................ 13, 14, 75, 82  
Dolby Digital ................................................................... 77, 78  
Dolby Digital Plus/TrueHD.................................................... 78  
DTS ................................................................................ 10, 78  
DTS-HD................................................................................ 79  
DUAL DISC .......................................................................... 11  
DVD (DVD-R/DVD-RW)  
V
VIDEO CABLE................................................................ 14, 17  
VIDEO MODE............................................................. 9, 10, 77  
VIDEO INPUT SETTING...................................................... 81  
VIDEO SETTINGS ............................................................... 57  
VR MODE......................................................................... 9, 10  
................................ 9, 10, 23, 25, 30, 39, 46, 53, 58, 72, 93  
DVD VIDEO.................................................. 10, 24, 30, 32, 76  
F
FINALIZE............................................................ 10, 41, 44, 58  
H
HDMI ........................................................................ 14, 80, 81  
HDMI AUDIO OUTPUT ........................................................ 81  
HDMI CABLE............................................................ 14, 17, 98  
HDMI OUTPUT RESOLUTION ............................................ 80  
HDMI-CEC...................................................................... 81, 98  
HIGH-SPEED DUBBING.............................. 10, 23, 24, 39, 77  
I
i.LINK............................................................ 13, 18, 23, 29, 37  
J
JPEG................................................ 24, 29, 30, 33, 35, 42, 55  
L
LANGUAGE CODE ........................................................ 76, 94  
LOCKING THE DISC TRAY ................................................. 82  
M
MENU LANGUAGE.............................................................. 76  
MODE LOCK........................................................................ 82  
MPEG2................................................................................... 9  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version  
2, June 1991  
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51  
Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA  
Important Notice  
Concerning the Software  
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies  
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.  
Software License Attached to the Product  
The Software embedded in the Product is composed of  
several independent software components, and in each  
of such individual components, a copyright of a third party  
subsists.  
Preamble  
The licenses for most software are designed to take away  
your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU  
General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom  
to share and change free software--to make sure the software  
is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to  
most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any  
other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other  
Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU  
Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to  
your programs, too.  
The Product uses the software component designated in the  
End-User License Agreement that was executed a third party  
(hereinafter "EULA").  
"EULA" covers those corresponding to free software, and,  
as a condition of distribution of the software component in  
executable format which is based on the license granted  
under the GNU General Public License or Lesser General  
Public License (hereinafter "GPL/LGPL"), it requires an  
availability of the source code for the relevant component. For  
details of the software component covered by "GPL/LGPL",  
please visit the following website:  
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom,  
not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make  
sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free  
software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you  
receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can  
change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs;  
and that you know you can do these things.  
URL : http://www.  
html  
teac.co.jp/support/opensource/index.  
Please note that we are unable to answer any inquiry relating  
to the contents, etc. of the source code.  
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid  
anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender  
the rights.  
These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if  
you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.  
Please note that any software component licensed under  
"EULA" which is not subject to "GPL/LGPL", and those  
developed or created independently shall not be subject to  
the requirement for provision of the source code.  
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program,  
whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all  
the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too,  
receive or can get the source code. And you must show them  
these terms so they know their rights.  
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the  
software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal  
permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.  
The software component distributed under "GPL/LGPL"  
shall be licensed to users without charge, and, therefore, no  
warranty is given for such software component, either express  
or implied, within the scope of the applicable laws and  
regulations. Unless otherwise permitted by applicable laws  
and regulations or agreed in written form, none of the owners  
of the copyright or persons entitled to alter or redistribute the  
software component under the said license shall have any  
liability for any type of damage or loss resulting from the use  
of or inability to use such software component. For further  
details of the conditions of use of such software component  
or matters required to be complied with, please refer to the  
relevant "GPL/LGPL".  
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make  
certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty  
for this free software. If the software is modified by someone  
else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what  
they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced  
by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.  
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software  
patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a  
free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect  
making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have  
made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's  
free use or not licensed at all.  
Users are urged to read the details for the relevant license  
carefully before using the software component covered by  
"GPL/LGPL" and embedded in the Product. Since the terms  
and conditions of individual licenses are provided by third  
parties, the original English version will be included.  
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and  
modification follow.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.  
If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the  
Program, and can be reasonably considered independent  
and separate works in themselves, then this License, and  
its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute  
them as separate works. But when you distribute the same  
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the  
Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of  
this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to  
the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless  
of who wrote it.  
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS  
AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,  
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION  
0. This License applies to any program or other work which  
contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may  
be distributed under the terms of this General Public License.  
The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work,  
and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program  
or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a  
work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim  
or with modifications and/or translated into another language.  
(Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the  
term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".  
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or  
contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather,  
the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of  
derivative or collective works based on the Program.  
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are  
not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The  
act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output  
from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute  
a work based on the Program (independent of having been  
made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends  
on what the Program does.  
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on  
the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the  
Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium  
does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.  
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based  
on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form  
under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you  
also do one of the following:  
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the  
Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium,  
provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on  
each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of  
warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License  
and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other  
recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with  
the Program.  
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding  
machinereadable source code, which must be distributed  
under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium  
customarily used for software interchange; or,  
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three  
years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than  
your cost of physically performing source distribution, a  
complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding  
source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections  
1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software  
interchange; or,  
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a  
copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in  
exchange for a fee.  
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or  
any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program,  
and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the  
terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of  
these conditions:  
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to  
the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This  
alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution  
and only if you received the program in object code  
or executable form with such an offer, in accord with  
Subsection b above.)  
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent  
notices stating that you changed the files and the date of  
any change.  
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish,  
that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the  
Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no  
charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.  
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the  
work for making modifications to it. For an executable work,  
complete source code means all the source code for all  
modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition  
files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation  
of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source  
code distributed need not include anything that is normally  
distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major  
components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating  
system on which the executable runs, unless that component  
itself accompanies the executable.  
c) If the modified program normally reads commands  
interactively when run, you must cause it, when started  
running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to  
print or display an announcement including an appropriate  
copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or  
else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users  
may redistribute the program under these conditions, and  
telling the user how to view a copy of this License.  
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering  
access to copy from a designated place, then offering  
equivalent access to copy the source code from the same  
place counts as distribution of the source code, even though  
third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with  
the object code.  
(Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not  
normally print such an announcement, your work based on  
the Program is not required to print an announcement.)  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the  
Program except as expressly provided under this License.  
Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute  
the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your  
rights under this License. However, parties who have received  
copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have  
their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full  
compliance.  
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted  
in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted  
interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the  
Program under this License may add an explicit geographical  
distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that  
distribution is permitted only in or among countries not  
thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the  
limitation as if written in the body of this License.  
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have  
not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to  
modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These  
actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License.  
Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any  
work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance  
of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for  
copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based  
on it.  
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/  
or new versions of the General Public License from time to  
time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present  
version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or  
concerns.  
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the  
Program specifies a version number of this License which  
applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of  
following the terms and conditions either of that version or of  
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation.  
If the Program does not specify a version number of this  
License, you may choose any version ever published by the  
Free Software Foundation.  
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work  
based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a  
license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify  
the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may  
not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise  
of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for  
enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.  
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other  
free programs whose distribution conditions are different,  
write to the author to ask for permission. For software which  
is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the  
Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions  
for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of  
preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free  
software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software  
generally.  
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation  
of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited  
to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether  
by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the  
conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the  
conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to  
satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and  
any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you  
may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent  
license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the  
Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly  
through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and  
this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the  
Program.  
NO WARRANTY  
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF  
CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM,  
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.  
EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING  
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES  
PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY  
OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR  
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE  
QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS  
WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE,  
YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY  
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable  
under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section  
is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to  
apply in other circumstances.  
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe  
any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity  
of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of  
protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system,  
which is implemented by public license practices.  
SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.  
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE  
LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT  
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY  
AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED  
ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,  
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE  
USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING  
BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING  
RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED  
BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE  
PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS),  
EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN  
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.  
Many people have made generous contributions to the wide  
range of software distributed through that system in reliance  
on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/  
donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software  
through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that  
choice.  
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is  
believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
This General Public License does not permit incorporating  
your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a  
subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit  
linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what  
you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License  
instead of this License.  
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS  
How to Apply These Terms to Your New  
Programs  
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the  
greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve  
this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute  
and change under these terms.  
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE  
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is  
safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most  
effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file  
should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to  
where the full notice is found.  
Version 2.1, February 1999  
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.,  
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA  
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies  
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.  
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of  
what it does.>  
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>  
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also  
counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License,  
version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]  
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/  
or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public  
License as published by the Free Software Foundation;  
either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later  
version.  
Preamble  
The licenses for most software are designed to take away  
your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU  
General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your  
freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the  
software is free for all its users.  
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,  
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied  
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public  
License for more details.  
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies  
to some specially designated software packages--typically  
libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors  
who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you  
first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary  
General Public License is the better strategy to use in any  
particular case, based on the explanations below.  
You should have received a copy of the GNU General  
Public License along with this program; if not, write to the  
Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth  
Floor, Boston, MA 02110- 1301 USA  
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom  
of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed  
to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies  
of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that  
you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you  
can change the software and use pieces of it in new free  
programs; and that you are informed that you can do these  
things.  
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and  
paper mail.  
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like  
this when it starts in an interactive mode:  
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author  
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY;  
for details type `show w'.  
This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it  
under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.  
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that  
forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to  
surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain  
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or  
if you modify it.  
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should  
show the appropriate parts of the General Public License.  
Of course, the commands you use may be called something  
other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be mouse-  
clicks or menu items-- whatever suits your program.  
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether  
gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the  
rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too,  
receive or can get the source code. If you link other code  
with the library, you must provide complete object files to the  
recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after  
making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you  
must show them these terms so they know their rights.  
You should also get your employer (if you work as a  
programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright  
disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample;  
alter the names:  
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the  
program `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers)  
written by James Hacker.  
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we  
copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which  
gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify  
the library. To protect each distributor, we want to make it  
very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also,  
if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the  
recipients should know that what they have is not the original  
version, so that the original author's reputation will not be  
affected by problems that might be introduced by others.  
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989  
Ty Coon, President of Vice  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the  
existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that  
a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free  
program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent  
holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained  
for a version of the library must be consistent with the full  
freedom of use specified in this license.  
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE  
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,  
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION  
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or  
other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright  
holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed  
under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also  
called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you".  
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered  
by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license,  
the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain  
designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary  
General Public License. We use this license for certain  
libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free  
programs.  
A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or  
data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application  
programs (which use some of those functions and data) to  
form executables.  
The "Library", below, refers to any such software library  
or work which has been distributed under these terms. A  
"work based on the Library" means either the Library or any  
derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work  
containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or  
with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into  
another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without  
limitation in the term "modification".)  
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or  
using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally  
speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library.  
The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such  
linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom.  
The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria  
for linking other code with the library.  
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the  
work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete  
source code means all the source code for all modules it  
contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus  
the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the  
library.  
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License  
because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than the  
ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free  
software developers Less of an advantage over competing  
non-free programs.  
These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary  
General Public License for many libraries. However, the  
Lesser license provides advantages in certain special  
circumstances.  
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are  
not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The  
act of running a program using the Library is not restricted,  
and output from such a program is covered only if its contents  
constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the  
use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true  
depends on what the Library does and what the program that  
uses the Library does.  
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need  
toencourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so  
that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free  
programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent  
case is that a free library does the same job as widely used  
non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting  
the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser  
General Public License.  
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the  
Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any  
medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately  
publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and  
disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer  
to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and  
distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.  
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-  
free programs enables a greater number of people to use a  
large body of free software. For example, permission to use  
the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more  
people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its  
variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.  
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a  
copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in  
exchange for a fee.  
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective  
of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a  
program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and  
the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version  
of the Library.  
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any  
portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and  
copy and distribute such modifications or work under the  
terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of  
these conditions:  
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution  
and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference  
between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses  
the library". The former contains code derived from the library,  
whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order  
to run.  
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.  
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent  
notices stating that you changed the files and the date of  
any change.  
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at  
no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a  
table of data to be supplied by an application program that  
uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when  
the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith  
effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not  
supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and  
performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.  
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of  
the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being  
compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the  
Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work  
of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this  
License.  
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the  
Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the  
Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather  
than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore  
covered by this License. Section  
(For example, a function in a library to compute square  
roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent  
of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that  
any application-supplied function or table used by this  
function must be optional: if the application does not supply  
it, the square root function must still compute square roots.)  
6 states terms for distribution of such executables.  
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a  
header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the  
work may be a derivative work of the Library even though  
the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially  
significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if  
the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is  
not precisely defined by law.  
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data  
structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small  
inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the  
object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a  
derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus  
portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)  
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If  
identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library,  
and can be reasonably considered independent and separate  
works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not  
apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate  
works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a  
whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the  
whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions  
for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each  
and every part regardless of who wrote it.  
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or  
contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather,  
the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of  
derivative or collective works based on the Library.  
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may  
distribute the object code for the work under the terms of  
Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall  
under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with  
the Library itself.  
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based  
on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the  
Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does  
not bring the other work under the scope of this License.  
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also  
combine or link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library  
to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and  
distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that  
the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's  
own use and reverse engineering for debugging such  
modifications.  
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU  
General Public License instead of this License to a given copy  
of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that  
refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU  
General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If  
a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General  
Public License has appeared, then you can specify that  
version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in  
these notices.  
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work  
that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use  
are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this  
License. If the work during execution displays copyright  
notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library  
among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the  
copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:  
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible  
for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License  
applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made  
from that copy.  
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code  
of the Library into a program that is not a library.  
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding  
machine-readable source code for the Library including  
whatever changes were used in the work (which must be  
distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work  
is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete  
machinereadable "work that uses the Library", as object  
code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the  
Library and then relink to produce a modified executable  
containing the modified Library. (It is understood that  
the user who changes the contents of definitions files in  
the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the  
application to use the modified definitions.)  
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or  
derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable  
form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that  
you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-  
readable source code, which must be distributed under the  
terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily  
used for software interchange.  
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to  
copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access  
to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the  
requirement to distribute the source code, even though third  
parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the  
object code.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with  
the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at  
run time a copy of the library already present on the user's  
computer system, rather than copying library functions into  
the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified  
version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the  
modified version is interface-compatible with the version  
that the work was made with.  
License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or  
any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance  
of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for  
copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based  
on it.  
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based  
on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license  
from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify  
the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may  
not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise  
of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for  
enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.  
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least  
three years, to give the same user the materials specified in  
Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost  
of performing this distribution.  
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to  
copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to  
copy the above specified materials from the same place.  
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation  
of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited  
to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether  
by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the  
conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the  
conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to  
satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and  
any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you  
may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent  
license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the  
Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly  
through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and  
this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the  
Library.  
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of  
thesematerials or that you have already sent this user a  
copy.  
For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses  
the Library" must include any data and utility programs  
needed for reproducing the executable from it. However,  
as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need  
not include anything that is normally distributed (in either  
source or binary form) with the major components (compiler,  
kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the  
executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies  
the executable.  
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable  
under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section  
is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to  
apply in other circumstances.  
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license  
restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally  
accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction  
means you cannot use both them and the Library together in  
an executable  
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe  
any patents or other property right claims or to contest  
validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose  
of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution  
system which is implemented by public license practices.  
Many people have made generous contributions to the wide  
range of software distributed through that system in reliance  
on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/  
donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software  
through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that  
choice.  
that you distribute.  
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on  
the Library side-by-side in a single library together with  
other library facilities not covered by this License, and  
distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate  
distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other  
library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you  
do these two things:  
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same  
work based on the Library, uncombined with any other  
library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of  
the Sections above.  
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is  
believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.  
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted  
in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted  
interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the  
Library under this License may add an explicit geographical  
distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that  
distribution is permitted only in or among countries not  
thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the  
limitation as if written in the body of this License.  
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of  
the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and  
explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined  
form of the same work.  
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute  
the Library except as expressly provided under this License.  
Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or  
distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate  
your rights under this License. However, parties who have  
received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not  
have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain  
in full compliance.  
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/  
or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from  
time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to  
the present version, but may differ in detail to address new  
problems or concerns.  
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have  
not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission  
to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works.  
These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If  
the Library specifies a version number of this License which  
applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of  
following the terms and conditions either of that version or of  
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation.  
If the Library does not specify a license version number, you  
may choose any version ever published by the Free Software  
Foundation.  
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the  
library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source  
file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty;  
and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a  
pointer to where the full notice is found.  
<one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what  
it does.>  
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>  
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other  
free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible  
with these, write to the author to ask for permission.  
For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software  
Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we  
sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be  
guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all  
derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing  
and reuse of software generally.  
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or  
modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public  
License as published by the Free Software Foundation;  
either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any  
later version.  
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,  
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied  
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General  
Public License for more details.  
NO WARRANTY  
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser  
General Public License along with this library; if not, write to  
the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth  
Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA  
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF  
CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY,  
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.  
EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING  
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES  
PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY  
OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,  
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR  
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE  
QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH  
YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU  
ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,  
REPAIR OR CORRECTION.  
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and  
paper mail.  
You should also get your employer (if you work as a  
programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright  
disclaimer" for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter  
the names:  
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the  
library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James  
Random Hacker.  
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE  
LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT  
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/  
OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE,  
BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY  
GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO  
USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO  
LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE  
OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES  
OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY  
OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER  
PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF  
SUCH DAMAGES.  
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990  
Ty Coon, President of Vice  
That's all there is to it!  
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS  
How to Apply These Terms to Your New  
Libraries  
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the  
greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it  
free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You  
can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or,  
alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public  
License).  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Others  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BD-R2000  
TEAC CORPORATION  
www.tascam.jp  
www.tascam.com  
www.tascam.com  
www.teacmexico.net  
www.tascam.co.uk  
Phone: +81-42-356-9143  
1-47 Ochiai, Tama-shi, Tokyo 206-8530, Japan  
TEAC AMERICA, INC.  
Phone: +1-323-726-0303  
7733 Telegraph Road, Montebello, California 90640 USA  
TEAC CANADA LTD.  
Phone: +1905-890-8008 Facsimile: +1905-890-9888  
5939 Wallace Street, Mississauga, Ontario L4Z 1Z8, Canada  
TEAC MEXICO, S.A. de C.V.  
Phone: +52-55-5010-6000  
Río Churubusco 364, Colonia Del Carmen, Delegación Coyoacán, CP 04100, México DF, México  
TEAC UK LIMITED  
Phone: +44-8451-302511  
Suites 19 & 20, Building 6, Croxley Green Business Park, Hatters Lane, Watford, Hertfordshire, WD18 8TE, UK  
TEAC EUROPE GmbH  
www.tascam.de  
Phone: +49-611-71580  
Bahnstrasse 12, 65205 Wiesbaden-Erbenheim, Germany  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Technics Speaker SB LV110 User Manual
Techno Source Baby Toy IM 21300B User Manual
Tektronix Water Dispenser 7L12 User Manual
Teledyne Oxygen Equipment 3010MB User Manual
Toshiba Copier MD 0101 User Manual
Toshiba Flat Panel Television 26AV502R User Manual
TravRoute GPS Receiver CoPilot Live User Manual
Ultra Products Carrying Case E Torque User Manual
Uniden Cordless Telephone DXI5186 2 User Manual
VTech Cordless Telephone IA5864 User Manual